HUAWEI NE40E-F Series

V800R012C10 to V800R023C00

Hardware Guide

Issue 03
Date 2024-12-31

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2025. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: https://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide Contents

Contents

1 Document Declaration........................................................................................................... 1
2 Using the Hardware Tool....................................................................................................... 4
3 Hardware Description.............................................................................................................5
3.1 chassis......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.1.1 NE40E-F1A-14H24Q........................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.2 Power........................................................................................................................................................................................ 16
3.2.1 PAC1K2S12-B (1200W AC&240V DC Power Module(Power panel side exhaust)).....................................16
3.2.2 PDC1K2S12-B (1200W DC Power Module(Power panel side exhaust))........................................................ 19
3.3 Fan............................................................................................................................................................................................. 22
3.3.1 FAN-036A-B (Fan box(B,FAN panel side exhaust))............................................................................................... 22
3.4 Optical Module...................................................................................................................................................................... 24
3.4.1 Pluggable Optical Modules............................................................................................................................................ 24
3.4.1.1 Optical Module Structure............................................................................................................................................ 24
3.4.1.2 Optical Module Classification.................................................................................................................................... 25
3.4.1.3 Optical Module Appearance.......................................................................................................................................27
3.4.1.4 How to Use an Optical Module................................................................................................................................ 32
3.4.1.5 Optical Attenuator Configuration............................................................................................................................ 43
3.4.2 1Gbps Electrical Module................................................................................................................................................. 44
3.4.2.1 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry.......................................................................................................................................... 44
3.4.3 1.25Gbps eSFP Optical Module.................................................................................................................................... 45
3.4.3.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended.................................................................................................... 45
3.4.3.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-100km-commercial.............................................................................................47
3.4.3.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (34060360).......................................................................48
3.4.3.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial............................................................................................... 49
3.4.3.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial............................................................................................... 50
3.4.3.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (S4017310).......................................................................52
3.4.4 1.25Gbps eSFP CWDM Optical Module..................................................................................................................... 53
3.4.4.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1571nm-80km-commercial............................................................................................... 53
3.4.4.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1591nm-80km-commercial............................................................................................... 54
3.4.4.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551nm-80km-commercial............................................................................................... 56
3.4.4.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1511nm-80km-commercial............................................................................................... 57
3.4.4.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1611nm-80km-commercial............................................................................................... 58

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide Contents

3.4.4.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1491nm-80km-commercial............................................................................................... 59
3.4.4.7 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531nm-80km-commercial............................................................................................... 61
3.4.4.8 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1471nm-80km-commercial............................................................................................... 62
3.4.5 125M~2.67Gbps eSFP DWDM Optical Module.......................................................................................................63
3.4.5.1 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1560.61nm-120km-commercial.........................................................................63
3.4.5.2 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1559.79nm-120km-commercial.........................................................................65
3.4.5.3 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.98nm-120km-commercial.........................................................................66
3.4.5.4 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.17nm-120km-commercial.........................................................................67
3.4.5.5 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1557.36nm-120km-commercial.........................................................................68
3.4.5.6 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1556.55nm-120km-commercial.........................................................................70
3.4.5.7 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1555.75nm-120km-commercial.........................................................................71
3.4.5.8 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.94nm-120km-commercial.........................................................................72
3.4.5.9 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.13nm-120km-commercial.........................................................................73
3.4.5.10 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1553.33nm-120km-commercial...................................................................... 75
3.4.5.11 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1552.52nm-120km-commercial...................................................................... 76
3.4.5.12 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551.72nm-120km-commercial...................................................................... 77
3.4.5.13 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.92nm-120km-commercial...................................................................... 78
3.4.5.14 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.12nm-120km-commercial...................................................................... 80
3.4.5.15 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1549.32nm-120km-commercial...................................................................... 81
3.4.5.16 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1548.51nm-120km-commercial...................................................................... 82
3.4.5.17 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1547.72nm-120km-commercial...................................................................... 83
3.4.5.18 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.92nm-120km-commercial...................................................................... 85
3.4.5.19 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.12nm-120km-commercial...................................................................... 86
3.4.5.20 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1545.32nm-120km-commercial...................................................................... 87
3.4.5.21 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1544.53nm-120km-commercial...................................................................... 88
3.4.5.22 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1543.73nm-120km-commercial...................................................................... 90
3.4.5.23 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.94nm-120km-commercial...................................................................... 91
3.4.5.24 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.14nm-120km-commercial...................................................................... 92
3.4.5.25 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1541.35nm-120km-commercial...................................................................... 93
3.4.5.26 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1540.56nm-120km-commercial...................................................................... 95
3.4.5.27 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1539.77nm-120km-commercial...................................................................... 96
3.4.5.28 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.98nm-120km-commercial...................................................................... 97
3.4.5.29 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.19nm-120km-commercial...................................................................... 98
3.4.5.30 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1537.40nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 100
3.4.5.31 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1536.61nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 101
3.4.5.32 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.82nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 102
3.4.5.33 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.04nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 103
3.4.5.34 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1534.25nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 105
3.4.5.35 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1533.47nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 106
3.4.5.36 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1532.68nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 107
3.4.5.37 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.90nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 108
3.4.5.38 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.12nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 110

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide Contents

3.4.5.39 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1530.33nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 111

3.4.5.40 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1529.55nm-120km-commercial.................................................................... 112
3.4.6 10Gbps SFP+ Optical Module..................................................................................................................................... 113
3.4.6.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial................................................................................................113
3.4.6.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial................................................................................................115
3.4.6.3 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial............................................................................................... 116
3.4.6.4 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial................................................................................................117
3.4.6.5 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial................................................................................................119
3.4.7 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps SFP+ Optical Module.................................................................................................... 120
3.4.7.1 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial (02311YNP)..................................... 120
3.4.7.2 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial.............................................................. 122
3.4.7.3 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial (34061042)...................................... 123
3.4.7.4 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial...............................................................125
3.4.8 10Gbps SFP+ CWDM Optical Module......................................................................................................................126
3.4.8.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1511nm-70km-commercial................................................................................................126
3.4.8.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1471nm-70km-commercial................................................................................................127
3.4.8.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1491nm-70km-commercial................................................................................................129
3.4.8.4 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1531nm-70km-commercial................................................................................................130
3.4.8.5 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1551nm-70km-commercial................................................................................................131
3.4.8.6 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1571nm-70km-commercial................................................................................................133
3.4.8.7 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1591nm-70km-commercial................................................................................................134
3.4.8.8 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1611nm-70km-commercial................................................................................................135
3.4.9 10Gbps SFP+ OTN Optical Module...........................................................................................................................136
3.4.9.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial............................................................................. 137
3.4.10 10Gbps SFP+ DWDM Optical Module................................................................................................................... 138
3.4.10.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial...........................................................................138
3.4.11 25Gbps SFP28 Optical Module................................................................................................................................ 140
3.4.11.1 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial...........................................................................................140
3.4.11.2 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry.................................................................................................. 141
3.4.11.3 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-extended............................................................................................... 142
3.4.12 40Gbps QSFP+ Optical Module............................................................................................................................... 144
3.4.12.1 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1271~1331nm-10km-commercial..............................................................144
3.4.12.2 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial..........................................................................145
3.4.12.3 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1271~1331nm-40km-commercial..............................................................147
3.4.13 100Gbps QSFP28 Optical Module.......................................................................................................................... 148
3.4.13.1 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial..................................................................... 148
3.4.13.2 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1310nm-30km(NO FEC)-40km(FEC)-commercial...........................150
3.4.13.3 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-commercial (02312BSS).....................152
3.4.13.4 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-commercial (02313SWA)...................153
3.5 Cables..................................................................................................................................................................................... 155
3.5.1 Power Cable...................................................................................................................................................................... 155
3.5.1.1 DC Power Cables.......................................................................................................................................................... 155

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide Contents

3.5.1.2 AC Power Cables.......................................................................................................................................................... 156

3.5.2 Chassis and Cabinet Ground Cable........................................................................................................................... 157
3.5.2.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................... 157
3.5.2.2 Structure......................................................................................................................................................................... 157
3.5.2.3 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................. 157
3.5.3 Console Port Cable......................................................................................................................................................... 158
3.5.3.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................... 158
3.5.3.2 Structure......................................................................................................................................................................... 159
3.5.3.3 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................. 160
3.5.4 Clock Cable........................................................................................................................................................................ 161
3.5.4.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................... 161
3.5.4.2 Structure......................................................................................................................................................................... 161
3.5.4.3 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................. 162
3.5.5 Ethernet Cable..................................................................................................................................................................162
3.5.5.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................... 162
3.5.5.2 Structure......................................................................................................................................................................... 163
3.5.5.3 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................. 165
3.5.6 Optical Fiber..................................................................................................................................................................... 166
3.5.6.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................... 166
3.5.6.2 Optical Connectors...................................................................................................................................................... 166
3.5.6.3 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................. 167
3.5.7 Breakout Fibers................................................................................................................................................................ 168
3.6 More Conference................................................................................................................................................................ 170

4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement............................................................171

4.1 Installation Guide............................................................................................................................................................... 171
4.1.1 Safety Precautions.......................................................................................................................................................... 171
4.1.1.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols....................................................................................................................................... 171
4.1.1.2 General Safety Precautions...................................................................................................................................... 172
4.1.1.3 Electrical Safety............................................................................................................................................................ 174
4.1.1.4 Precautions for Connecting a Computer to the Device.................................................................................. 176
4.1.1.5 Inflammable Environment........................................................................................................................................ 177
4.1.1.6 Batteries.......................................................................................................................................................................... 178
4.1.1.6.1 VRLA Batteries........................................................................................................................................................... 178
4.1.1.6.2 Lithium Batteries...................................................................................................................................................... 180
4.1.1.7 Radiation........................................................................................................................................................................ 180
4.1.1.7.1 Electromagnetic Exposure..................................................................................................................................... 180
4.1.1.7.2 Forbidden Areas........................................................................................................................................................ 180
4.1.1.7.3 Lasers............................................................................................................................................................................ 181
4.1.1.8 Working at Heights..................................................................................................................................................... 181
4.1.1.8.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects.......................................................................................................................................... 182
4.1.1.8.2 Using Ladders............................................................................................................................................................ 183
4.1.1.9 Mechanical Safety....................................................................................................................................................... 184

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide Contents

4.1.1.10 Others............................................................................................................................................................................185
4.1.2 Preparing for the Installation......................................................................................................................................186
4.1.2.1 Preparing for Installation.......................................................................................................................................... 186
4.1.2.1.1 Preparing Technical Documents.......................................................................................................................... 186
4.1.2.1.2 Preparing Tools and Meters..................................................................................................................................187
4.1.2.1.3 Qualification of Installation Engineers............................................................................................................. 187
4.1.2.2 Environmental Requirements for Device Operation........................................................................................ 187
4.1.2.2.1 Requirements for Selecting a Site for Equipment Room............................................................................ 187
4.1.2.2.2 Equipment Room Layout....................................................................................................................................... 188
4.1.2.2.3 Construction Requirements for the Equipment Room................................................................................ 189
4.1.2.2.4 Requirements for Temperature, Humidity, and Altitude............................................................................ 191
4.1.2.2.5 Requirements for Handling Corrosive Gases.................................................................................................. 192
4.1.2.2.6 Requirements for ESD Prevention...................................................................................................................... 192
4.1.2.2.7 Electromagnetism Requirements for the Equipment Room......................................................................193
4.1.2.2.8 Requirements for Lightning-Proof Grounding............................................................................................... 193
4.1.2.2.9 Dust Resistance and Water Resistance............................................................................................................. 195
4.1.2.2.10 Requirements for Power Supply....................................................................................................................... 196
4.1.2.3 Unpacking and Checking the Products................................................................................................................ 199
4.1.2.3.1 Checking the Package Container........................................................................................................................ 199
4.1.2.3.2 Unpacking the Wooden Case............................................................................................................................... 200
4.1.2.4 Checking the Boards................................................................................................................................................... 203
4.1.3 On-site Cable Assembly and Installation................................................................................................................ 204
4.1.3.1 Cable Assembling Precautions................................................................................................................................ 204
4.1.3.2 Assembling Power Cables......................................................................................................................................... 206
4.1.3.2.1 Assembling a Power Cable with an OT Terminal..........................................................................................206
4.1.3.2.2 Assembling a Power Cable with a JG Terminal............................................................................................. 209
4.1.3.2.3 Assembling a Power Cable to a Cord End Terminal.....................................................................................212
4.1.3.3 Assembling Ethernet Cables.................................................................................................................................... 215
4.1.3.3.1 Assembling an Ethernet Cable with a Shielded RJ45 Connector.............................................................215
4.1.3.3.2 Checking the Metal Contacts............................................................................................................................... 221
4.1.3.3.3 Testing the Connectivity of Assembled Ethernet Cables............................................................................ 224
4.1.3.4 Installing Cable Accessories..................................................................................................................................... 227
4.1.3.4.1 Precautions for Installing Cable Accessories................................................................................................... 227
4.1.3.4.2 Installing Power Adapters..................................................................................................................................... 229
4.1.3.4.3 Installing Network Port Connectors.................................................................................................................. 234
4.1.3.4.4 Installing Fiber Connectors................................................................................................................................... 236
4.1.3.5 Replacing the Mould of a Crimping Tool............................................................................................................ 244
4.1.4 Equipment Grounding Specifications....................................................................................................................... 247
4.1.4.1 General Grounding Specifications..........................................................................................................................247
4.1.4.2 Grounding Specifications for Equipment Room................................................................................................ 248
4.1.4.3 Grounding Specifications for Devices................................................................................................................... 248
4.1.4.4 Grounding Specifications for Power Supply Systems...................................................................................... 249

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide Contents

4.1.4.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables........................................................................................................ 250

4.1.4.6 Specifications for Laying Ground Cables............................................................................................................. 250
4.1.5 Labels for Cables............................................................................................................................................................. 251
4.1.5.1 Introduction to Labels................................................................................................................................................ 251
4.1.5.1.1 Label Materials......................................................................................................................................................... 252
4.1.5.1.2 Type and Structure...................................................................................................................................................252
4.1.5.1.3 Label Printing............................................................................................................................................................ 254
4.1.5.1.4 Writing Labels........................................................................................................................................................... 255
4.1.5.1.5 Attaching Labels....................................................................................................................................................... 256
4.1.5.1.6 Contents of Labels................................................................................................................................................... 258
4.1.5.1.7 Precautions for Using Labels................................................................................................................................ 259
4.1.5.2 Labels for Fibers........................................................................................................................................................... 259
4.1.5.2.1 Labels for Fibers Connecting Devices................................................................................................................ 259
4.1.5.2.2 Labels for Fibers Connecting the Device and ODF....................................................................................... 261
4.1.5.3 Labels for Network Cables....................................................................................................................................... 263
4.1.5.4 Labels for Trunk Cables............................................................................................................................................. 265
4.1.5.4.1 Labels for Trunk Cables Between Devices....................................................................................................... 265
4.1.5.4.2 Labels for Trunk Cables Between the Device and a DDF........................................................................... 266
4.1.5.5 Labels for User Cables............................................................................................................................................... 268
4.1.5.6 Labels for Power Cables............................................................................................................................................ 269
4.1.5.6.1 Labels for DC Power Cables..................................................................................................................................270
4.1.5.6.2 Labels for AC Power Cables.................................................................................................................................. 271
4.1.6 Powering on Devices...................................................................................................................................................... 272
4.1.6.1 Checking the Installation.......................................................................................................................................... 272
4.1.6.1.1 Device Installation Checklist.................................................................................................................................272
4.1.6.1.2 Cable Installation Checklist...................................................................................................................................275
4.2 Parts Replacement............................................................................................................................................................. 278
4.2.1 Overview of Parts Replacement.................................................................................................................................278
4.2.1.1 Basic Operation Process............................................................................................................................................ 278
4.2.2 Replacing a Fan Module............................................................................................................................................... 280
4.2.2.1 Introduction to the Fan Module............................................................................................................................. 281
4.2.2.2 Replacing a Fan Module............................................................................................................................................281
4.2.3 Replacing a Power Module.......................................................................................................................................... 283
4.2.3.1 Introduction to the Power Module........................................................................................................................ 283
4.2.3.2 Replacing a Power Module...................................................................................................................................... 283
4.2.4 Replacing an Optical Module..................................................................................................................................... 285
4.2.5 Replacing Cables............................................................................................................................................................. 289
4.2.5.1 Cable Types.................................................................................................................................................................... 289
4.2.5.2 Replacing a Power Cable and a Ground Cable................................................................................................. 289
4.2.5.2.1 Introduction to a Power Cable.............................................................................................................................289
4.2.5.2.2 Replacing a Power Cable....................................................................................................................................... 290
4.2.5.3 Replacing a Network Cable......................................................................................................................................291

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide Contents

4.2.5.4 Replacing a Trunk Cable............................................................................................................................................293

4.2.5.5 Replacing an Optical Cable...................................................................................................................................... 294
4.2.6 Glossary ............................................................................................................................................................................. 296
4.2.7 Acronyms and Abbreviations...................................................................................................................................... 297

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 1 Document Declaration

1 Document Declaration

Purpose
This document describes hardware features of the NE40E-F. It helps intended
readers obtain detailed information about each chassis, board, and cable, and
learn how to install and maintain devices.

NOTICE

The Hardware Guide includes hardware data of multiple versions. Before using this
document, check the first version supported by the hardware.

Related Version

NOTICE

The following table lists the product versions involved in this document. Before
reading this document, confirm whether your versions are included in this
document.

Product Name Version

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series Applicable to:

● V800R012C10SPC300
● V800R013C00SPC100
● V800R021C00SPC100
● V800R021C10SPC600
● V800R022C00SPC600
● V800R022C10SPC500
● V800R023C00SPC500

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 1 Document Declaration

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:

● Network planning engineers

● Hardware installation engineers
● Commissioning engineers
● On-site maintenance engineers
● System maintenance engineers

Special Declaration
● The pictures of hardware in this document are for reference only.
● The supported boards are described in the document. Whether a
customization requirement can be met is subject to the information provided
at the pre-sales interface.
● All device dimensions described in this document are designed dimensions
and do not include dimension tolerances. In the process of component
manufacturing, the actual size is deviated due to factors such as processing or
measurement.

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if

not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk

which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if

not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if

not avoided, could result in equipment damage,
data loss, performance deterioration, or
unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to
personal injury.

Supplements the important information in the main

text.
NOTE is used to address information not related to
personal injury, equipment damage, and
environment deterioration.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 1 Document Declaration

Change History
● Changes in Issue 03 (2024-12-31)
This is the third official release
● Changes in Issue 02 (2024-08-30)
This is the second official release
● Changes in Issue 01 (2024-06-30)
This is the first official release

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 2 Using the Hardware Tool

2 Using the Hardware Tool

Enterprise:
In the enterprise network market, Info-Finder is a tool platform, It allows you to
search for key product information by product series and model. The key product
information includes basic information such as the software specifications, life
cycles, and hardware information, and operation and maintenance information
such as the licenses, alarms, logs, commands, and MIBs. The hardware-related
tools are as follows:
● Product image gallery: provides product photos, and network element icons
for you to produce design drawings and networking diagrams.
● Hardware configuration: automatically generates hardware configuration
diagrams after you select components are required and calculates the weight,
power consumption, and heat consumption.
● Hardware center: provides the technical specifications of devices and
components, as well as the mapping between devices, components, and
versions.
● 3D model: Using this function, you can query product images, product
overview, and component insertion/removal videos, enabling you to quickly
obtain product information in one-stop mode.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3 Hardware Description

3.1 chassis
3.2 Power
3.3 Fan
3.4 Optical Module
3.5 Cables
3.6 More Conference

3.1 chassis

3.1.1 NE40E-F1A-14H24Q

Overview

Table 3-1 Basic information about the NE40E-F1A-14H24Q

Description Part Number Model First Integrated
supported fixed device
version

NE40E- 02351YYY CR5B0BKP039 V800R011C00 Y

F1A-14H24Q 2 SPC200
Integrated
Chassis
Components

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-1 Appearance of the NE40E-F1A-14H24Q 1

Figure 3-2 Appearance of the NE40E-F1A-14H24Q 2

Components

Figure 3-3 Components of the NE40E-F1A-14H24Q

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Slot Layout

Figure 3-4 Slot Layout of the NE40E-F1A-14H24Q

Table 3-2 Slots on the NE40E-F1A-14H24Q

Slot Type Slot ID Slot Direction Remarks

PIC 1 The top of the Fixed Interface

board faces Board
upwards

PIU 2 - -

PIU 3 - -

FAN 4 - -

FAN 5 - -

FAN 6 - -

FAN 7 - -

FAN 8 - -

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Panel

Table 3-3 Port attributes about the NE40E-F1A

Attributes Details

Working mode Full-duplex

Standards compliance IEEE 802.3

Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP and

Ethernet_SNAP

Table 3-4 Indicators on the NE40E-F1A-14H24Q

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

STAT Working Green Steady on The device is

status working
indicator normally.

Red Steady on The device

generates a
hardware
alarm.

- Off The device is

not running
or no power
is input.

MGMT-ETH Management Green Steady on The link is up.

port status
indicator Green Blinking Data is being
transmitted or
received.

Green Off The link is

down.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

Breakout(0 to Breakout Green Blinking Each indicator

3) channel for channels
indicator 0, 1, 2, and 3
turns on for
5s in
sequence to
indicate the
status of the
corresponding
channel. This
process
repeats.
NOTE
If you want to
view the
running status
of channel 0,
press the
Breakout
button to
switch
indicator 0 to
steady on. In
this case, the
status of the
L/A indicator
on each
interface
indicates the
running status
of channel 0.

- Off No data is
transmitting
or receiving in
this channel.

0 to 43 Port status Green Steady on The link is up.

indicator
Green Blinking Data is being
transmitted or
received.

- Off The link is

down.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-5 Buttons on the NE40E-F1A-14H24Q

Silkscreen Name Description

RST Reset button Press and hold the

button for 3 seconds or
longer, the board is reset,
and the SYS-STAT
indicator keeps blinking.

BREAKOUT Breakout button When you press the

button, the channel
indicators stop status
cycling and remain in the
current status. Then,
each time you press the
button, the channel
indicators' status
switches. If you do not
press the button within
60s, the indicators
automatically start
status cycling.

Table 3-6 Ports on the NE40E-F1A-14H24Q

Port Connector Type Description Available
Components

0 to 23 SFP28 Interface for 1Gbps Electrical

inputting and Module
outputting 25GE/ 1.25Gbps eSFP
10GE/GE optical Optical Module
signals
10Gbps SFP+
Optical Module
25Gbps SFP28
Optical Module

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Port Connector Type Description Available

Components

24 to 29 QSFP28 Interface for 40Gbps QSFP+

inputting and Optical Module
outputting 100Gbps QSFP28
100GE/40GE/ Optical Module
breakout 4x10G
optical signals
NOTE
One of ports No.
24-29 and four
ports of No. 0-23
occupy 100G
bandwidth
simultaneously. For
example: If ports
from 0 to 3 are
used as 25 GE ,
port No. 24 cannot
be worked.

30 to 43 QSFP28 Interface for 40Gbps QSFP+

inputting and Optical Module
outputting 100Gbps QSFP28
100GE/40GE/ Optical Module
breakout 4x10G
optical signals

GE0/GE1 SFP Interface for 1.25Gbps eSFP

inputting and Optical Module
outputting GE
optical signals

MGMT-ETH RJ45 Ethernet interface Category 5

(10M/100M/ enhanced
1000M Base-TX shielded twisted
autonegotiation), pairs
which connects to
the NMS
workstation.

CON/AUX RJ45 Console/AUX 8-core shielded

interface, which cables
connects to the
console for onsite
system
configuration. The
default baud rate
is 9600 bit/s.(AUX
hybrid interface
reserved)

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Port Connector Type Description Available

Components

TOD RJ45 Time input/output Directly

interface. One- connected
channel 1PPS network cables
+TOD time signal (shielded or non-
input or output shielded).
and one-channel
DCLS input and
output.

CLK RJ45 Clock input/ 120-ohm clock

output interface. cable
Interface for 2
Mbit/s clock
signal and 2 MHz
clock signal input
or output.

Power Supply System

The system supports DC or AC power supply in 1+1 backup mode.
The system supports fault monitoring and alarming for the power supply system.
The power supply system consists of two power modules working in 1+1 backup
mode. The two power supply channels in backup mode are converted by two
independent power modules and then provided for control boards and fan
modules.

Figure 3-5 Power supply architecture

Heat Dissipation System

The NE40E-F1A has a front-to-rear cooling path.

NOTE

Do not stack the NE40E-F1Awith devices that use upper and lower air channels.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-6 Airflow of the NE40E-F1A

Technical Specifications

Table 3-7 Technical specifications of the CR5B0BKP0392

Item Specification

Cabinet installation standards ETSI 21-inch; IEC 19-inch

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 43.6 mm x 442 mm x 600 mm (1.72 in.

x D) [mm(in.)] x 17.40 in. x 23.62 in.)

Chassis height [U] 1U

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 12 kg (26.46 lb)

Typical power consumption (with 470 W

configuration) [W]

Typical heat dissipation (with 1524.9 BTU/hour

configuration) [BTU/hour]

MTBF [year] 26.2 year

MTTR [hour] 2 hour

Availability 0.9999912859

CPU 16-core, 2.0 GHz

SDRAM 16 GB

Flash memory 128 MB

Storage 4 GB

Power supply mode ● DC

● AC/HVDC

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Rated input voltage [V] DC: -48 V/-60 V

AC: 100 V to 240 V
HVDC: 240 V DC

Input voltage range [V] DC: –40 V to –72 V

AC: 90 V to 290 V
HVDC: 188 V DC to 290 V DC

Maximum input current [A] DC: 38 A

AC: 10 A
HVDC: 8 A

Maximum input cable size [mm²] DC: 6 mm^2(<25 meters). 4 mm^2

(1-15 meters) recommended.
AC: 2.5 mm^2
HVDC: 2.5 mm^2

Front-end circuit breaker/fuse [A] DC: ≥40 A

AC: ≥10 A
HVDC: ≥8 A

Heat dissipation mode Air cooling

Airflow direction Front to back: port-side intake

Noise at normal temperature (acoustic < 72 dB (meeting the ETSI 72 dBA

power) [dB(A)] standard)

Noise at high temperature (acoustic < 72 dB (meeting the ETSI 72 dBA

power) [dB(A)] standard)

Number of slots 8

Number of service board slots 1

Switching capacity 4 Tbit/s

Maximum number of physical ports on 44

the entire device

Maximum number of 100GE ports 20

Maximum number of 40GE ports 20

Maximum number of 25GE ports 24

Maximum number of 10GE ports 24

Maximum number of GE ports 24

Redundant power supply 1+1

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Specification

Redundant fans If a single fan fails, the system can still

work for a short period of time at an
ambient temperature of 40°C.

Long-term operating temperature –5°C to +45°C (23°F to 113°F)

[°C(°F)]

Restriction on the operating ≤ 0.5°C/min (32.9°F/min), non-

temperature variation rate [°C(°F)] condensing

Storage temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to +158 °F)

Long-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 85% RH, non-condensing

[RH]

Short-term operating relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing

[RH]

Storage relative humidity [RH] 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing

Long-term operating altitude [m(ft.)] ≤ 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) (For the

altitude in the range of 1800 m to
4000 m [5905.44 ft. to 13123.2 ft.], the
operating temperature of the device
decreases by 1°C [33.8°F] each time
the altitude increases by 220 m
[721.78 ft.].)

Storage altitude [m(ft.)] < 5000 m (16404.2 ft.)

Breakout supported Yes. Only 100GE interfaces support

interface splitting.
To enable interface splitting, run the
port split command.

Interface rate auto-sensing supported Yes

100GE ports support 40GE/100GE
auto-sensing.
25GE ports support 1GE/10GE/25GE
auto-sensing.
GE ports support 1GE/10GE auto-
sensing.

FlexE supported No

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

NOTE

● About condensation
The ability of air to contain moisture reduces as the temperature decreases. There is a
relationship between temperature and relative humidity. As the temperature decreases,
the air becomes more saturated with moisture, meaning the relative humidity increases.
But at a low enough temperature (called the dew point), the air can no longer contain
moisture, which is then precipitated as liquid water. Such water on the surface of
relevant equipment is called condensation.
● Hazards of condensation
When condensation mixes with dust inside the equipment, it forms conductive channels
that affect the electrical insulation of the equipment. As a result, a non-conductive area
of the equipment can become conductive, causing the equipment to malfunction.
● Conditions that cause condensation
Condensation is related to temperature changes and humidity. It occurs when the
temperature continues to decrease below the dew point at a given humidity. For
example, given that the relative humidity is 50% RH and the temperature is 25°C (77°F),
condensation occurs when the temperature decreases below 13.9°C (57.02°F).

3.2 Power

3.2.1 PAC1K2S12-B (1200W AC&240V DC Power

Module(Power panel side exhaust))
The device uses two power modules, which work in 1+1 backup mode.

Overview

Table 3-8 Basic information about the PAC1K2S12-B

Item Details

Description 1200W AC&240V DC Power

Module(Power panel side exhaust)

Part Number 02312DUM

Model PAC1K2S12-B

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-7 Appearance of the PAC1K2S12-B

Version Mapping

Table 3-9 Mappings between PAC1K2S12-B and product models

Product Product First Limitations IDs of
Model Supported available
Version slots

NE40E- CR5B0BKP039 V800R011C00 - 2, 3

F1A-14H24Q 2 (02351YYY) SPC200

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Panel

Table 3-10 Indicators on the PAC1K2S12-B

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Power supply Green Steady on Normal input

status and active
indicator output.

Green Blinking Powered on

but not
inserted into
the system (1
Hz).

Red Steady on Fan faults,

power
overtemperat
ure
protection,
power output
overcurrent
protection,
output
overvoltage
protection,
input
undervoltage
protection, or
input
overvoltage
protection.

- Off No power
input.

Table 3-11 Ports on the PAC1K2S12-B

Port Description

AC power cable connector AC power input interface

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-12 Technical specifications of the PAC1K2S12-B

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 39.6 mm x 66 mm x 350 mm (1.56 in.

x D) [mm(in.)] x 2.6 in. x 13.78 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 1.4 kg (3.09 lb)

Rated input voltage [V] 110 V AC/220 V AC/240 V DC

Input voltage range [V] 90 V to 290 V AC or 188 V to 290 V DC

Maximum input current [A] 10 A (@90 V AC, 800 W output)

8 A (@240 V DC, 1200 W output)

Power supply efficiency 0.94

Power dissipation Mode Built-in fan

Type of power cables C13

3.2.2 PDC1K2S12-B (1200W DC Power Module(Power panel

side exhaust))
The device uses two power modules, which work in 1+1 backup mode.

Overview

Table 3-13 Basic information about the PDC1K2S12-B

Item Details

Description 1200W DC Power Module(Power panel

side exhaust)

Part Number 02312DVC

Model PDC1K2S12-B

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-8 Appearance of the PDC1K2S12-B

Version Mapping

Table 3-14 Mappings between PDC1K2S12-B and product models

Product Product First Limitations IDs of
Model Supported available
Version slots

NE40E- CR5B0BKP039 V800R011C00 - 2, 3

F1A-14H24Q 2 (02351YYY) SPC200

Panel
● DC power monitoring:
The DC power monitoring channel can implement real-time monitoring on
power supply. In addition, the DC power monitoring channel allows you to
query the manufacturing ID, output voltage, and temperature of the power
modules in real time, and supports real-time reporting of power supply
alarms.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

● DC power cable configuration:

You do not need to connect protection ground cables to the DC power
modules, but the protection ground cable for the chassis must be properly
grounded. DC power cables include a -48 V power cable and an RTN ground
cable. The required cable length depends on the distance between the cabinet
and the power distribution cabinet for the device. The DC power cables need
to be prepared according to the required lengths on site.

Table 3-15 Indicators on the PDC1K2S12-B

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Power supply Green Steady on Normal input

status and active
indicator output.

Green Blinking Powered on

but not
inserted into
the system (1
Hz).

Red Steady on Fan faults,

power
overtemperat
ure
protection,
power output
overcurrent
protection,
output
overvoltage
protection,
input
undervoltage
protection, or
input
overvoltage
protection.

- Off No power
input.

Table 3-16 Ports on the PDC1K2S12-B

Port Description

NEG(-) -48 V/-60 V power input interface

RTN(+) BGND power input interface

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Technical Specifications

Table 3-17 Technical specifications of the PDC1K2S12-B

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 39.6 mm x 66 mm x 350 mm (1.56 in.

x D) [mm(in.)] x 2.6 in. x 13.78 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 1.4 kg (3.09 lb)

Rated input voltage [V] –48 V/–60 V

Input voltage range [V] –40 V to –72 V

Maximum input current [A] 38 A

Power supply efficiency 0.93

Power dissipation Mode Built-in fan

Type of power cables 4 to 6 mm^2(Electronic|Electric Cable)

3.3 Fan

3.3.1 FAN-036A-B (Fan box(B,FAN panel side exhaust))

Overview

Table 3-18 Basic information about the FAN-036A-B

Item Details

Description Fan box(B,FAN panel side exhaust)

Part Number 02312EYW

Model FAN-036A-B

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Appearance

Figure 3-9 Appearance of the FAN-036A-B

Version Mapping

Table 3-19 Mappings between FAN-036A-B and product models

Product Product First Limitations IDs of
Model Supported available
Version slots

NE40E- CR5B0BKP039 V800R011C00 - 4, 5, 6, 7, 8

F1A-14H24Q 2 (02351YYY) SPC200

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Panel

Table 3-20 Indicators on the FAN-036A-B

Silkscreen Name Color Status Description

- Fan status Green Steady on The fan is

indicator working
properly.

Red Steady on The fan

module is
faulty.

- Off The fan

module is not
powered on
or encounters
a hardware
error.

Technical Specifications

Table 3-21 Technical specifications of the FAN-036A-B

Item Specification

Dimensions without packaging (H x W 40 mm x 40 mm x 128 mm (1.57 in. x

x D) [mm(in.)] 1.57 in. x 5.04 in.)

Weight without packaging [kg(lb)] 0.2 kg (0.44 lb)

Number of fans 1

Typical power consumption [W] 6W

3.4 Optical Module

3.4.1 Pluggable Optical Modules

3.4.1.1 Optical Module Structure

Figure1 shows the structure of an optical module.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-10 Optical module structure

1. Handle 2. Receiver 3. Transmitter 4. Shell

5. Label 6. Dust cap 7. Spring 8. Module

connector

3.4.1.2 Optical Module Classification

Optical modules are available in various types to meet diversified requirements.

● Classified by transmission rate

Currently, the transmission rates of optical modules cover a wide range.
According to different transmission rates, optical modules can be classified
into 400 Gbit/s optical modules, 200 Gbit/s optical modules, 100 Gbit/s optical
modules, 40 Gbit/s optical modules, 25 Gbit/s optical modules, and 10 Gbit/s
optical modules, 2.5 Gbit/s optical modules, 1.25 Gbit/s optical modules, 1000
Mbit/s optical modules, 155 Mbit/s optical modules, and 100 Mbit/s optical
modules.
● Classified by encapsulation type
The higher transmission rate an optical module provides, the more complex
structure it has. According to the encapsulation type, optical modules are
classified into SFP, eSFP, SFP+, XFP, SFP28, QSFP28, QSFP+, QSFP-DD, CXP, CFP,
and CSFP.
– SFP: small form-factor pluggable.
– eSFP: enhanced small form-factor pluggable. An eSFP optical module is
an SFP optical module that supports monitoring of voltage, temperature,
bias current, transmit optical power, and receive optical power. Currently,
SFP modules also have the preceding functions. Therefore, eSFP and SFP
optical modules are both called SFP optical modules.
– SFP+: small form-factor pluggable plus. An SPF+ optical module is an SFP
module with a higher rate. SFP+ optical modules are more sensitive to
electromagnetic interference (EMI) because they have a higher rate.
Compared with SFP modules, SFP+ optical modules use more springs and
tighter SFP+ optical module cages.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

– XFP: 10G small form-factor pluggable. X is the Roman numeral 10,

meaning that all XFP optical modules provide a transmission rate of 10
Gbit/s. XFP optical modules are wider and longer than SFP+ optical
modules.
– SFP28: small form-factor pluggable 28. The size of an SFP28 optical
module is the same as that of an SFP+ optical module. An SFP28 port can
use a 25G SFP28 optical module or 10G SFP+ optical module.
– QSFP28: quad small form-factor pluggable 28. The size of a QSFP28
optical module is the same as that of a QSFP+ optical module. A QSFP28
port can use either a 100G QSFP28 optical module or a 40G QSFP+
optical module.
– QSFP+: quad small form-factor pluggable plus. QSFP+ optical modules
support MPO fiber connectors and are larger than SFP+ optical modules.
– QSFP-DD: quad small form factor pluggable-double density. A QSFP-DD
optical module is a high-speed pluggable module defined by the QSFP-
DD MSA group.
– CXP: extended-capability form-factor pluggable. A CXP optical module is
a hot-pluggable high-density parallel optical module, which provides 12
channels of traffic in each of the Tx and Rx directions. It applies only to
short-distance multimode links.
– CFP: centum form-factor pluggable, a new standard for high-speed, hot-
pluggable optical transceivers that support data communication and
telecommunication applications. The dimensions of a CFP optical module
are 13.6 mm x 144.75 mm x 82 mm (0.54 in. x 5.70 in. x 3.23 in.).
– CSFP: compact small form-factor pluggable. A CSFP optical module is a
compact SFP transceiver with two 100 Mbit/s or 1 Gbit/s single-fiber
bidirectional transceivers inside a standard SFP form factor. Its compact
and low-power design allows the system supplier to double port density
and access channel quantity for the LPU. This type of optical module is
mainly used in scenarios where one CSFP optical module connects to two
BIDI SFP optical modules. It is essential to ensure that the transmit and
receive wavelengths are consistent and the transmission distances are the
same.
● Classified by physical layer standard
Different physical layer standards are defined to allow data transmission in
different modes. Therefore, different types of optical modules are produced to
comply with these standards. For details, see standards compliance of the
specific optical module.
● Classified by mode
Optical fibers are classified into single-mode and multimode fibers. Therefore,
optical modules are also classified into single-mode and multimode modules
to support different optical fibers.
– Single-mode optical modules are used with single-mode fibers. Single-
mode fibers support a wide band and large transmission capacity, and are
used for long-distance transmission.
– Multimode optical modules are used with multimode fibers. Multimode
fibers have lower transmission performance than single-mode fibers
because of modal dispersion, but their costs are also lower. They are used
for small-capacity, short-distance transmission.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

WDM modules differ from other types of optical modules in center wavelengths. A
common optical module has a center wavelength of 850 nm, 1310 nm, or 1550
nm, whereas a WDM module has different center wavelengths. WDM modules are
classified into two types: coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) and
dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM). Within the same band, DWDM
modules are available in more types and use wavelength resources more
efficiently than CWDM modules. DWDM and CWDM modules allow lights with
different center wavelengths to be transmitted on one fiber without interfering
each other. Therefore, a passive multiplexer can be used to combine the lights into
one channel, which is then split into multiple channels by a demultiplexer on the
remote end. This reduces the optical fibers required. DWDM and CWDM modules
are used for long-distance transmission.
The transmit power of a long-distance optical module is often larger than its
overload power. Therefore, when using such optical modules, select optical fibers
of an appropriate length to ensure that the actual receive power is smaller than
the overload power. If the optical fibers connected to a long-distance optical
module are too short, use an optical attenuator to reduce the receive power on
the remote optical module. Otherwise, the remote optical module may be burnt.

3.4.1.3 Optical Module Appearance

The following lists some common optical modules, which may not be supported
by this product. The figures are for reference only.

Table 3-22 Commonly used optical modules

Encaps Interface Appearance
ulatio type
n type

SFP LC Single-fiber bidirectional

RJ45 1 Gbps electrical module

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Encaps Interface Appearance

ulatio type
n type

eSFP LC Two-fiber bidirectional

Single-fiber bidirectional

SFP+ LC Two-fiber bidirectional

Single-fiber bidirectional

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Encaps Interface Appearance

ulatio type
n type

XFP LC Two-fiber bidirectional

Single-fiber bidirectional

SFP28 LC Two-fiber bidirectional

Single-fiber bidirectional

QSFP2 LC/MPO Two-fiber bidirectional

8

Single-fiber bidirectional

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Encaps Interface Appearance

ulatio type
n type

QSFP+ LC/MPO

CXP MPO

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Encaps Interface Appearance

ulatio type
n type

CFP LC/MPO CFP

CFP2

CFP4

CFP8

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Encaps Interface Appearance

ulatio type
n type

CSFP LC

QSFP- LC
DD

3.4.1.4 How to Use an Optical Module

This section provides instructions on how to use an optical module.

NOTE

Only optical modules matching Huawei products can be used. These optical modules are
strictly tested by Huawei. If non-matching optical modules are used, device requirements
may fail to be met, and services may fail to run properly. To replace optical modules, see
Parts Replacement > Replacing an Optical Module.

ESD Measures
Before touching any optical module, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. Take
full ESD measures when installing optical apparatus such as optical modules
indoors or outdoors.

Figure 3-11 Method for wearing ESD gloves

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-12 Method for wearing the ESD wrist strap

Placing Optical Apparatus and Fibers

Do not touch the pins or edge connectors of optical modules with bare hands.
Handle optical fibers gently. Use two fingers to hold the fiber connector instead of
grasping the fiber or fiber cover.

Avoid applying axial or lateral pressure to a fiber. Refrain from folding or twisting
a fiber or crushing its pigtail. Do not drag a fiber or apply pressure to the coupling
point of its pigtail. Figure 3-13 shows how to properly place optical apparatus and
fibers.

Figure 3-13 Methods for placing optical apparatus and fibers

NOTE

During installation, ensure that an optical fiber is coiled into a loop with a diameter of at
least 6 cm.

Uninstalling Optical Apparatus

● Release the latch and slowly take out the optical apparatus. Do not drag the
optical fiber to forcibly take out the optical module. Ensure that the optical
fiber is connected to and removed from the optical interface horizontally.
Before taking out an optical module, remove its optical fiber and release its
latch first.

Figure 3-14 Closed latch

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-15 Released latch

● The black plastic latch shown by (1) in Figure 3-16 is the unlocking device for
the 155 Mbit/s electrical transceiver. You can press the latch to unlock the
optical module. Hold the two sides of the optical module to remove it, as
shown by (2) in Figure 3-16.

Figure 3-16 Removing a 155 Mbit/s electrical transceiver

Do not remove the black plastic latch when removing the 155 Mbit/s
electrical transceiver.

If the black plastic latch falls off, use an auxiliary tool, such as a pair of
tweezers, to press the cage latch, as shown in Figure 3-17. Then, hold the
two sides of the optical module to remove it.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-17 Pressing the buckle of the optical cage

● If the CFP2 optical module is used, its unlocking device is a spring clip, as
shown by (1) in Figure 3-18. Before removing such an optical module, release
the latch first. Then, hold the latch to horizontally remove the optical module.

Figure 3-18 Removing a CFP2 optical module

● When removing a CFP optical module, loosen the two screw rods of the
module and then remove the module slowly. Do not directly drag the optical
fiber to pull out the optical module or forcibly pull out the optical module.
Ensure that the optical fiber is connected to and removed from the optical
interface horizontally.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

CAUTION

The QSFP28 and QSFP-DD modules will get very hot during operation. To
prevent injuries, do not touch the module shells when removing the modules.

Precautions for Loose Optical Modules

● When installing an optical module, firmly push it into position until you hear
a click or feel a slight tremor, signaling that the optical module is securely
locked. If the optical module is not securely locked, its edge connector may be
loosely connected to the board connector, and the link may still be up.
However, if the optical module experiences tremors or collisions with other
objects, it may come loose or temporarily lose optical signals.
● When inserting the optical module, ensure that the latch is closed (the latch
locks the optical module). After the optical module is inserted, try pulling it
out to see if it is installed in position. If the optical module cannot be pulled
out, it is secured.
● If you cannot push the optical module into an optical module cage any
further, the optical module is in good contact with the board connector.
● When installing a CFP optical module, push the module panel horizontally
into the connector using even force with both thumbs. After the module is
inserted, push the module slightly to ensure that it has reached the stop
position.
● When inserting a CFP optical module into a board, ensure that the module is
in full contact with the connector. At the same time, fasten the captive screws

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

at both ends of the CFP optical module. If you fasten the captive screws one
by one, the CFP optical module may fail to be securely installed. You are
advised to use a screwdriver to tighten the screws on the optical module.

Precautions for Receptacle Contamination

● Prepare cleaning tissues for onsite use. Clean an optical connector before
inserting it into the receptacle to protect the receptacle against
contamination.
NOTE

Use at least three cleaning tissues. Wipe the end of an optical connector horizontally
in one direction, and then shift the connector to the unused part of the cleaning tissue
to continue. Generally, one cleaning tissue is used for cleaning one optical connector.

● Cover optical modules that are temporarily unused with dust-proof caps to
prevent dust pollution. If no dust-proof caps are available, inserting fibers can
effectively prevent dust from entering these optical modules.
Covering temporarily unused optical modules with dust-proof caps

Using a fiber instead of a dust-proof cap to prevent dust pollution

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

● Cover optical fiber jumpers that are temporarily unused with dust-proof caps
and place them on the optical distribution frame (ODF) or coil them up in a
fiber management tray. Ensure that they are not compressed or squeezed.

● If optical modules or fibers remain unused for a long time without being
covered with dust-proof caps, clean their receptacles or optical connectors
before using them again. Use cotton swabs to clean receptacles and fiber
cleaning tissues to clean fiber connectors.
NOTE

When cleaning a receptacle, gently insert a cotton swab and rotate it without applying
excessive force. Otherwise, the receptacle may be damaged.

● If optical signals are unexpectedly lost during device operation, use the
previously mentioned method to clean the receptacle or optical connector.
This can help exclude contamination as the cause of signal loss.

Precautions for Overload-caused Burnt Optical Modules

● When using an OTDR to test the connectivity or attenuation of a fiber
channel, disconnect the optical fiber from the optical module. Otherwise, the
optical module may be burnt.
● When performing a self-loop test, use an optical attenuator if necessary. Do
not loosen the optical connector instead.
● It is required that a long-distance optical module have an input optical power
of less than –7 dBm. If the input optical power is greater than –7 dBm, you
need to add an optical attenuator. For example, if the transmit optical power
is X dBm and the optical attenuation is Y dB, the receive optical power is X –
Y, which must be smaller than –7 dBm (X – Y < –7 dBm).

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Inspecting Optical Fiber Connectors

As the Ethernet port rate continues to rise, the quality standards for optical fibers
and cables rise accordingly. Table 3-23 describes requirements for the loss of
optical fiber connectors according to the national standard (GBT50312-2016).

Table 3-23 Maximum attenuation of optical fiber connectors

Type Maximum Attenuation of an Optical Fiber
Connector (dB)

Fiber splicing connector 0.3

Optical mechanical connector 0.3

Optical connector 0.75

NOTE

Fiber cores are connected through connectors, such as the ODF, optical attenuator, and
flange, in splicing and mechanical modes.

Table 3-24 describes requirements in IEEE Std 802.3-2018 for the reflection of the
optical fiber connector when Ethernet ports (such as 200G and 50G) use PAM4
encoding to double the rate. More connectors bring lower requirements for the
reflection.

Table 3-24 Maximum reflection of connectors

Number of Optical Fiber Maximum Reflection of Each Connector
Connectors (dB)

1 –22

2 –29

4 –33

6 –35

8 –37

10 –39

The loss and reflectance values of optical fiber connectors are tested and
processed as follows:
1. Disconnect the peer optical fiber and use the OTDR to test the loss and
reflection of each link and node at the local end. Check whether the loss and
reflection of each link and node are normal (splicing connector loss < 0.3 dB/
node, connector loss < 0.75 dB/node, and connector reflection < –30 dB/
node). If the loss and reflection exceed the limits, handle the abnormal
interface.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

2. Based on the distance of the abnormal point in the OTDR test result, locate
the equipment room where the interface is located and preliminarily
determine the interface location. Disconnect the interface and perform the
OTDR test on the interface that reports the alarm to check whether the
distance is consistent with the previous test. If not, continue to test other
interfaces.
3. After locating the abnormal interface, use a fiberscope to check the interface.
If the interface is contaminated, clean it.
4. After the interface is cleaned, restore the interface and tighten the connector.
Perform an OTDR test on the interface that reports alarms to check whether
the loss and reflection of each link and node are normal.
5. If the fault persists, replace the flange plate and perform an OTDR test on the
interface that reports the alarm to check whether the loss and reflection of
each link and node are normal.
6. If the fault persists, replace the optical fiber and perform an OTDR test on the
interface that reports the alarm to check whether the loss and reflection of
each link and node are normal.
7. If there are multiple abnormal points on the link, repeat steps 2 to 6.

Other Precautions
● An optical connector must be horizontally inserted into a receptacle to avoid
damages to the receptacle.

● Mixed use of multimode and single-mode optical fibers is prohibited.

Otherwise, faults such as signal loss may occur.
The following table describes methods for distinguishing single-mode optical
modules from multimode optical modules.

Table 3-25 Method for distinguishing single-mode optical modules from

multimode optical modules

Item Single-Mode Multimode

Transmission distance 10 km or longer Below 0.5 km

Wavelength Non-850 nm 850 nm

Information on the SM MM
label

50G Optical Module Installation

1. Precautions for optical module installation

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

(1) If a cabinet with a door is used, a sufficient distance must be reserved between
the optical module and the cabinet door to prevent the latch or pigtail from
bumping on the door.
(2) Long-distance optical modules must be equipped with optical attenuators for
self-loops. For a 50GBase-ER (40 km) long-distance optical module, the receive
optical power damage threshold is lower than the average minimum transmit
optical power, making the module prone to damage caused by self-loops.
Therefore, the module must be equipped with an optical attenuator for self-loops.
(3) When optical path quality is tested using an OTDR, optical fibers must be
removed from the associated optical module. This is because the OTDR's transmit
optical power is far greater than the optical power damage threshold at the
receive end of an optical module.
2. Method for checking an optical path

Figure 3-19 Method for checking an optical path

3. Method for cleaning the end faces of an optical fiber

Before cleaning the end faces of an optical fiber that is in use, ensure that the
optical fiber has no optical signals. To achieve this, shut down the ports at both
ends of the fiber. Then, clean the end faces and insert the optical fiber back into
the corresponding port.
To clean the end faces of an optical fiber that is not in use, remove the dust-proof
cap from the fiber connector (or the pigtail connector of the involved optical
component), and put the dust-proof cap into a dedicated cleaning kit. After the
cleaning is complete, re-install the dust-proof cap.
● Use the untouched part of a lint-free wipe to wipe the connector end face
along one direction.
● If the end face of an optical fiber cannot be cleaned due to serious
contamination, use a lint-free wipe dipped with cleanser to wipe the end face
along one direction. Then, use a dry lint-free wipe to clean the end face.
Ensure that the end face is dry before using the optical fiber.
● After the cleaning is complete, immediately install a dust-proof cap for any
optical fiber connector that is not in use.
4. Precautions for using a lint-free wipe to clean the end face of an optical
fiber
● Use the smooth surface of the lint-free wipe for cleaning.
● Ensure that the optical fiber connector is vertical to the lint-free wipe during
cleaning.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

● Wipe the end face along the direction of the lint-free wipe's grain.
● Wipe the end face along one direction only.
● Any part of a lint-free wipe can be used only once, and a small piece of lint-
free wipe can be used to clean only one connector.
5. Method for using lint-free swabs to clean the optical port of an optical
module
Remove the dust-proof cap from the optical port of the optical module, and put
the dust-proof cap into a dedicated cleaning kit.
● Select a proper lint-free swab based on the type of the optical port to be
cleaned. (For SC optical ports, use lint-free swabs with a diameter of 2.5 mm;
for LC and MTRJ optical ports, use lint-free swabs with a diameter of 1.25
mm.) Dip the lint-free swab into cleanser, insert it into the inside of the
optical port, and clean the optical port by rotating the swab 360 degrees in
one direction along the inner wall of the optical port.
● Insert a dry lint-free swab of the same type into the optical port and clean the
optical port by rotating the swab 360 degrees in one direction along the inner
wall of the optical port.
● Cover the optical port with a dust-proof cap after the cleaning is complete.
6. Precautions for using lint-free swabs to clean the optical port of an optical
module
● When cleaning the optical port of an optical module, clean the end faces of
associated optical fibers to prevent the optical fibers from contaminating the
optical port.
● In general, each lint-free swab can be used for cleaning only once. If a used
lint-free swab is confirmed clean and can be reused, it can be used for a
maximum of three times. For example, a lint-free swab that is ever used to
dry an optical port can be used for a maximum of three times.
7. Safety precautions
● Electrostatic protection: Active optical and electrical components are
extremely sensitive to electrostatic. Therefore, take strict measures to protect
against electrostatic. For example, wear ESD gloves during operations and
touch only the shell of the involved component.
● Laser protection: Do not look into optical ports without eye protection when
reseating a module.
8. Discrete reflectance
During link deployment, focus on the reflection indicators of each node. The
discrete reflection indicators must meet the IEEE specifications.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-26 Maximum discrete reflectances of QSFP28 50G defined by IEEE

Number of QSFP28 50G-FR QSFP28 50G-LR QSFP28 50G-ER
Discrete (Maximum Value (Maximum Value (Maximum Value
Reflectances of Each Discrete of Each Discrete of Each Discrete
Greater Than –55 Reflectance Reflectance Reflectance
dB Coefficient) Coefficient) Coefficient)

1 –25 dB –22 dB –19 dB

2 –31 dB –29 dB –27 dB

4 –35 dB –33 dB -32 dB

6 –38 dB –35 dB –35 dB

8 –40 dB –37 dB –37 dB

10 –41 dB –39 dB –39 dB

3.4.1.5 Optical Attenuator Configuration

This section describes how to configure an optical attenuator.

Calculating the Optical Attenuation

You can calculate the optical attenuation based on the actual optical power.

Table 3-27 Parameters for calculating optical attenuation

Name Description

P(in)min Worst sensitivity (maximum value of

the worst sensitivity).

P(out)max Maximum transmit optical power.

S Transmission distance.

A Attenuation coefficient. Note that the

attenuation coefficient is related to
optical fiber types and wavelengths.
Generally, the attenuation coefficient is
0.45 dBm/km or 0.4 dBm/km. The
attenuation coefficient of a 1550-nm
wavelength is 0.235 dBm/km or 0.25
dBm/km.

P(in)max Maximum receive optical power, that

is, minimum overload point.

The principle for determining whether an attenuator needs to be configured at a

transmission point is as follows:

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

If P(out)max – S x A > P(in)max, an attenuator needs to be configured. The

optical attenuation is calculated in the following formula: T= P(out)max – S x A –
P(in)max.

Table 3-28 Reference for configuring an attenuator

Part Descriptio P(out) P(out) P(in) P(in)

Number n max min min max

34060276 eSFP,1310n –8 dBm –15 dBm –31 dBm –8 dbm

m,STM1,LC
,SM,15km

NOTE

● If P(in)max of an optical module equals P(out)max, you do not need to configure an

attenuator.
● You can choose the 5 dBm and 10 dBm attenuators for optical modules on the device.

Part Numbers and Descriptions of Attenuators

Table 3-29 Part numbers and descriptions of attenuators

Part Number Description

45030021 Fixed Optical

Attenuator,1260nm~1620nm-5dB-LC/
PC-45dB

45030022 Fixed Optical

Attenuator,1260nm~1620nm-10dB-LC/
PC-45dB

NOTE

This table is for reference only. The part numbers of attenuators vary according to
configuration documents.

3.4.2 1Gbps Electrical Module

3.4.2.1 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry

Table 3-30 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Module name 1Gbps-SFP-100m-industry

Part Number 02310RAV

Model OEGD01N01

Form factor SFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000Base-T

Connector type RJ45

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 10 Mbit/s

100 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km

3.4.3 1.25Gbps eSFP Optical Module

3.4.3.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended

Table 3-31 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-extended specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-MMF-850nm-500m-

extended

Part Number 34060286

Model eSFP-850nm-1000Base-Sx/FC200 MM

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-SX

Connector type LC

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -20°C to 85°C(-4°F to 185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.5 km(OM1)

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 770 nm - 860 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9.5 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 760 nm - 860 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -17 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.3.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-100km-commercial

Table 3-32 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-100km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-100km-

commercial

Part Number 34060295

Model eSFP-GE-ZX100-SM1550

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-ZX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 100 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1500 nm - 1580 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -30 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific.

3.4.3.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (34060360)

Table 3-33 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-

commercial

Part Number 34060360

Model eSFP-1550nm-1000Base-Zx/FC100

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-ZX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1500 nm - 1580 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific.

3.4.3.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial

Table 3-34 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-10km-

commercial

Part Number S4016067

Model OSG010N05

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-LX10

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1270 nm - 1355 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -3 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -9 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1270 nm - 1355 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -20 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -3 dBm

3.4.3.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial

Table 3-35 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1310nm-40km-

commercial

Part Number S4016954

Model OSG040002

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-EX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1275 nm - 1350 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -5 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -3 dBm

3.4.3.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial (S4017310)

Table 3-36 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550nm-80km-

commercial

Part Number S4017310

Model OSG080N02

Form factor eSFP

Application standard IEEE 802.3, 1000BASE-ZX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1500 nm - 1580 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1580 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -3 dBm

NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific.

3.4.4 1.25Gbps eSFP CWDM Optical Module

3.4.4.1 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1571nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-37 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1571nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1571nm-80km-

commercial

Part Number 34060476

Model eSFP-LH80-SM1571

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1571 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1564.5 nm - 1577.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.4.2 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1591nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-38 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1591nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1591nm-80km-

commercial

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 34060477

Model eSFP-LH80-SM1591

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1591 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1584.5 nm - 1597.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.4.3 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-39 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551nm-80km-

commercial

Part Number 34060478

Model eSFP-LH80-SM1551

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1551 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1544.5 nm - 1557.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.4.4 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1511nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-40 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1511nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1511nm-80km-

commercial

Part Number 34060479

Model eSFP-LH80-SM1511

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Center wavelength [nm] 1511 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1504.5 nm - 1517.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.4.5 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1611nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-41 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1611nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1611nm-80km-

commercial

Part Number 34060480

Model eSFP-LH80-SM1611

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1611 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1604.5 nm - 1617.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.4.6 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1491nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-42 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1491nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1491nm-80km-

commercial

Part Number 34060481

Model eSFP-LH80-SM1491

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1491 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1484.5 nm - 1497.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.4.7 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-43 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531nm-80km-

commercial

Part Number 34060482

Model eSFP-LH80-SM1531

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1531 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1524.5 nm - 1537.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.4.8 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1471nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-44 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1471nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1471nm-80km-

commercial

Part Number 34060483

Model eSFP-LH80-SM1471

Form factor eSFP

Application standard ITU-T G.957, STM-16

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1471 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1464.5 nm - 1477.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 5 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -9 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5 125M~2.67Gbps eSFP DWDM Optical Module

3.4.5.1 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1560.61nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-45 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1560.61nm-120km-commercial

specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1560.61nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060366

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.10

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1560.61 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.5.2 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1559.79nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-46 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1559.79nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1559.79nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060372

Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.20

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1559.79 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.3 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.98nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-47 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.98nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1558.98nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060373

Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.30

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1558.98 nm

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.4 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.17nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-48 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1558.17nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1558.17nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060374

Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.40

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1558.17 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.5 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1557.36nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-49 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1557.36nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1557.36nm-120km-commercial

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 34060375

Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.50

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1557.36 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.5.6 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1556.55nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-50 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1556.55nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1556.55nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060376

Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.60

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1556.55 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.7 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1555.75nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-51 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1555.75nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1555.75nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060377

Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.70

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1555.75 nm

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.8 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.94nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-52 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.94nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1554.94nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060378

Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.80

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1554.94 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.9 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.13nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-53 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1554.13nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1554.13nm-120km-commercial

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 34060379

Model eSFP-LH120-SM192.90

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1554.13 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.5.10 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1553.33nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-54 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1553.33nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1553.33nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060380

Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.00

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1553.33 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.11 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1552.52nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-55 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1552.52nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1552.52nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060381

Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.10

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1552.52 nm

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.12 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551.72nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-56 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1551.72nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1551.72nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060382

Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.20

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1551.72 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.13 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.92nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-57 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.92nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1550.92nm-120km-commercial

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 34060383

Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.30

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550.92 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.5.14 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.12nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-58 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1550.12nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1550.12nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060384

Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.40

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550.12 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.15 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1549.32nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-59 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1549.32nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1549.32nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060385

Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.50

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1549.32 nm

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.16 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1548.51nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-60 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1548.51nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1548.51nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060386

Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.60

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1548.51 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.17 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1547.72nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-61 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1547.72nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1547.72nm-120km-commercial

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 34060387

Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.70

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1547.72 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.5.18 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.92nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-62 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.92nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1546.92nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060388

Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.80

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1546.92 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.19 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.12nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-63 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1546.12nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1546.12nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060389

Model eSFP-LH120-SM193.90

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1546.12 nm

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.20 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1545.32nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-64 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1545.32nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1545.32nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060390

Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.00

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1545.32 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.21 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1544.53nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-65 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1544.53nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1544.53nm-120km-commercial

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 34060391

Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.10

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1544.53 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 89

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.5.22 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1543.73nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-66 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1543.73nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1543.73nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060392

Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.20

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1543.73 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.23 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.94nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-67 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.94nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1542.94nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060393

Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.30

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1542.94 nm

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.24 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.14nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-68 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1542.14nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1542.14nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060394

Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.40

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 92

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1542.14 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.25 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1541.35nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-69 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1541.35nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1541.35nm-120km-commercial

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 34060395

Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.50

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1541.35 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.5.26 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1540.56nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-70 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1540.56nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1540.56nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060396

Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.60

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1540.56 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.27 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1539.77nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-71 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1539.77nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1539.77nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060397

Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.70

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1539.77 nm

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.28 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.98nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-72 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.98nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1538.98nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060398

Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.80

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1538.98 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.29 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.19nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-73 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1538.19nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1538.19nm-120km-commercial

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 34060399

Model eSFP-LH120-SM194.90

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1538.19 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.5.30 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1537.40nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-74 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1537.40nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1537.40nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060400

Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.00

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1537.4 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 100

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.31 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1536.61nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-75 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1536.61nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1536.61nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060401

Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.10

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1536.61 nm

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 101

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.32 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.82nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-76 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.82nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1535.82nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060402

Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.20

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 102

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1535.82 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.33 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.04nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-77 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1535.04nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1535.04nm-120km-commercial

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 103

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 34060403

Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.30

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1535.04 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 104

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.5.34 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1534.25nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-78 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1534.25nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1534.25nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060404

Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.40

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1534.25 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.35 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1533.47nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-79 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1533.47nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1533.47nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060405

Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.50

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1533.47 nm

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 106

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.36 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1532.68nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-80 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1532.68nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1532.68nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060406

Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.60

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1532.68 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.37 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.90nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-81 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.90nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1531.90nm-120km-commercial

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 108

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Part Number 34060407

Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.70

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1531.9 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.5.38 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.12nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-82 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1531.12nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1531.12nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060408

Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.80

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1531.12 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.39 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1530.33nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-83 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1530.33nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1530.33nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060409

Model eSFP-LH120-SM195.90

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1530.33 nm

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.5.40 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1529.55nm-120km-commercial

Table 3-84 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-SMF-1529.55nm-120km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 125M~2.67Gbps-eSFP-

SMF-1529.55nm-120km-commercial

Part Number 34060410

Model eSFP-LH120-SM196.00

Form factor eSFP

Application standard SONET OC-48 LR-2, Gigabit Ethernet

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 155 Mbit/s ~ 2.67 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 120 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1529.55 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1520 nm - 1570 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -28 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -8 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.6 10Gbps SFP+ Optical Module

3.4.6.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-85 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-80km-

commercial

Part Number 02310PVU

Model OSX080N04

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ZR/ZW

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s

10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1565 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -24 dBm

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific. Self-loop is not supported. An optical attenuator
must be added if self-loop is required.

3.4.6.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial

Table 3-86 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-40km-

commercial

Part Number 34061409

Model Default

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm- 1355nm

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -2 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm-1600nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -20 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific. Self-loop is not supported. An optical attenuator
must be added if self-loop is required.

3.4.6.3 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial

Table 3-87 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-

commercial

Part Number S4017482

Model OSX040N03

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-SR/SW

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s

10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.3 km(OM3)

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) -1 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -7.3 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -9.9 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -11.1 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -1 dBm

3.4.6.4 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial

Table 3-88 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-

commercial

Part Number S4017483

Model OSX001002

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-LR/LW

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s

10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1355 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 0.5 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.2 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1355 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -14.4 dBm

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -12.6 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] 0.5 dBm

3.4.6.5 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial

Table 3-89 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-

commercial

Part Number S4017484

Model OMXD30002

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s

10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 119

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -4.7 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -15.8 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -14.1 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -1 dBm

NOTE
Self-loop is not supported. An optical attenuator must be added if self-loop is required.

3.4.7 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps SFP+ Optical Module

3.4.7.1 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial
(02311YNP)

Table 3-90 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial

specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-

SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial

Part Number 02311YNP

Model OSX010N14

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-LR/LW,

1000BASE-LX

Connector type LC

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] GE: 10 km

10GE: 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: 0.5 dBm

[dBm] 10GE: 0.5 dBm

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: -8.2 dBm

[dBm] 10GE: -8.2 dBm

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] GE: 9 dB

10GE: 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] GE: -19 dBm

10GE: -14.4 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 121

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.7.2 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial

Table 3-91 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-

MMF-850nm-0.3km-commercial

Part Number 34061041

Model OSXD50N00

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-SR/SW,

1000BASE-SX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.55 km(OM3/GE)

0.3 km(OM3/10GE)

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: 0 dBm

[dBm] 10GE: -1 dBm

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 122

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: -9.5 dBm

[dBm] 10GE: -7.3 dBm

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] GE: 9 dB

10G: 3 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] GE: -17 dBm

10GE: -9.9 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -1 dBm

3.4.7.3 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial
(34061042)

Table 3-92 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial

specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-

SMF-1310nm-10km-commercial

Part Number 34061042

Model OSX010N13

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-LR/LW,

1000BASE-LX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 123

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] GE: 10 km

10GE: 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: 0.5 dBm

[dBm] 10GE: 0.5 dBm

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: -8.2 dBm

[dBm] 10GE: -8.2 dBm

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] GE: 9 dB

10GE: 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1360 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] GE: -19 dBm

10GE: -14.4 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 0.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] 0.5 dBm

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 124

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.7.4 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial

Table 3-93 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial

specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 1.25/9.953/10.3125Gbps-SFP+-

SMF-1550nm-40km-commercial

Part Number 34061043

Model OSX040N12

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ER/EW,

1000BASE-LX

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 1.25 Gbit/s

9.953 Gbit/s
10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] GE: 40 km

10GE: 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1550 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: 4 dBm

[dBm] 10GE: 4 dBm

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) GE: -4.7 dBm

[dBm] 10GE: -4.7 dBm

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] GE: 9 dB

10GE: 3.0 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1530 nm - 1565 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] GE: -15.8 dBm

10GE: -15.8 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -1 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -1 dBm

3.4.8 10Gbps SFP+ CWDM Optical Module

3.4.8.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1511nm-70km-commercial

Table 3-94 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1511nm-70km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1511nm-70km-

commercial

Part Number 34060686

Model OSX070001

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s

10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 70 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1511 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1504.5 nm - 1517.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.8.2 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1471nm-70km-commercial

Table 3-95 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1471nm-70km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1471nm-70km-

commercial

Part Number 34060687

Model OSX070002

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s

10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 70 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1471 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1464.5 nm - 1477.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 128

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.8.3 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1491nm-70km-commercial

Table 3-96 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1491nm-70km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1491nm-70km-

commercial

Part Number 34060688

Model OSX070003

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s

10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 70 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1491 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1484.5 nm - 1497.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 129

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.8.4 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1531nm-70km-commercial

Table 3-97 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1531nm-70km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1531nm-70km-

commercial

Part Number 34060689

Model OSX070004

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s

10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 70 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1531 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1524.5 nm - 1537.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.8.5 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1551nm-70km-commercial

Table 3-98 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1551nm-70km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1551nm-70km-

commercial

Part Number 34060690

Model OSX070005

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 131

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s

10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 70 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1551 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1544.5 nm - 1557.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 132

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.8.6 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1571nm-70km-commercial

Table 3-99 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1571nm-70km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1571nm-70km-

commercial

Part Number 34060691

Model OSX070006

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s

10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 70 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1571 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1564.5 nm - 1577.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 133

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -23 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.8.7 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1591nm-70km-commercial

Table 3-100 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1591nm-70km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1591nm-70km-

commercial

Part Number 34060692

Model OSX070007

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s

10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 70 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1591 nm

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1584.5 nm - 1597.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -21 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.8.8 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1611nm-70km-commercial

Table 3-101 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1611nm-70km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1611nm-70km-

commercial

Part Number 34060693

Model OSX070008

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-X

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s

10.3125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 70 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1611 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1604.5 nm - 1617.4 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) 0 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8.2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1460 nm - 1620 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -21 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.9 10Gbps SFP+ OTN Optical Module

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.9.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-102 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-

SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number 02311GSA

Model OSX080C00

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ZR/ZW, ITUT

G.709

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(10GE)

<1x10E-4(OTU2, OTU2e)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s

10.3125 Gbit/s
11.1 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] -

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1529.163 nm - 1560.606

nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 3 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 137

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -1 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1600 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -24 dBm(10GE 1e-12);

-26 dBm(OTU2,OTU2e,1e-4)

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific.

3.4.10 10Gbps SFP+ DWDM Optical Module

3.4.10.1 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial

Table 3-103 10Gbps-SFP+-SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 10Gbps-SFP+-

SMF-1528nm~1568nm-80km-
commercial

Part Number 02311GSA

Model OSX080C00

Form factor SFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ae, 10GBASE-ZR/ZW, ITUT

G.709

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12(10GE)

<1x10E-4(OTU2, OTU2e)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 9.953 Gbit/s

10.3125 Gbit/s
11.1 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 80 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] -

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1529.163 nm - 1560.606

nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 3 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -1 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 9 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1260 nm - 1600 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -24 dBm(10GE 1e-12);

-26 dBm(OTU2,OTU2e,1e-4)

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] -7 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The interface standard is Huawei-specific.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.11 25Gbps SFP28 Optical Module

3.4.11.1 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial

Table 3-104 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-

commercial

Part Number 34061254

Model OMXD30011

Form factor SFP28

Application standard IEEE802.3-2012, 25GBASE-SR

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <5x10E-5

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 25.78125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 2.4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.4 dBm

[dBm]

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -10.3 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 2.4 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.11.2 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry

Table 3-105 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-industry specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 25Gbps-SFP28-SMF-1310nm-10km-

industry

Part Number 34061618

Model SFP28-25G-1310nm-10km-SM

Form factor SFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3 by-2016, 25GBASE-LR,

10GBASE-LR

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <5x10E-5(24.33024G,25.78125G)

<1x10E-12(9.8304G,10.1376G,10.3125
G)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] –40°C to +85°C(–40°F to +185°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Transmission rate [bit/s] 25.78125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1310 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1295 nm - 1325 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 2 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -7 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1295 nm - 1325 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -11.3 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 2 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

3.4.11.3 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-extended

Table 3-106 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-extended specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 25Gbps-SFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-

extended

Part Number 34061631

Model SFP28-25G-850nm-0.1km-MM

Form factor SFP28

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Application standard IEEE 802.3 by-2016, 25GBASE-SR,

10GBASE-SR

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <5x10E-5(24.33024G,25.78125G)

<1x10E-12(9.8304G,10.1376G,10.3125
G)

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] -20°C to 75°C(-4°F to 167°F)

DDM options SFF-8472

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 1000 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 25.78125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) 2.4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) -8.4 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) -

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -10.3 dBm

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] -

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] 2.4 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 143

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.12 40Gbps QSFP+ Optical Module

3.4.12.1 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1271~1331nm-10km-commercial

Table 3-107 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1271~1331nm-10km-commercial

specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-

SMF-1271~1331nm-10km-commercial

Part Number 02310WUT

Model OMXD30009

Form factor QSFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ba, 40GBASE-LR4

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8436

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 41.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1271 nm

1291 nm
1311 nm
1331 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1264.5 nm - 1277.5 nm

1284.5 nm - 1297.5 nm
1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm
1324.5 nm - 1337.5 nm

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 2.3 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 3.5 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -7 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: -4 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1264.5 nm - 1277.5 nm

1284.5 nm - 1297.5 nm
1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm
1324.5 nm - 1337.5 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -11.5 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 2.3 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value.

3.4.12.2 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial

Table 3-108 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial

specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-

MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial

Part Number 02310WUU

Model OMXD30010

Form factor QSFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3ba, 40GBASE-SR4

Connector type MPO-12

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8436

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 41.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.1 km(OM3)

0.15 km(OM4)

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 0.5 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 3 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -7.6 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: -5.6 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 3 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -9.5 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 0.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.12.3 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1271~1331nm-40km-commercial

Table 3-109 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-SMF-1271~1331nm-40km-commercial

specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 40Gbps(4*10.3)-QSFP+-

SMF-1271~1331nm-40km-commercial

Part Number 02311LVJ

Model OSM040N01

Form factor QSFP+

Application standard IEEE 802.3bm, 40GBASE-ER4

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8436

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 41.25 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1271 nm

1291 nm
1311 nm
1331 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1264.5 nm - 1277.5 nm

1284.5 nm - 1297.5 nm
1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm
1324.5 nm - 1337.5 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 4.5 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 5 dBm

[dBm]

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -2.7 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 0.3 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 5.5 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1264.5 nm - 1277.5 nm

1284.5 nm - 1297.5 nm
1304.5 nm - 1317.5 nm
1324.5 nm - 1337.5 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -19 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: -4.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
1. The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. The optical power read by the
device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical power.
2. The maximum transmission distance of the 100GBASE-ER4 optical module is 40 km,
which mainly covers the transmission distance of 10 km to 40 km. If the transmission
distance is less than 10 km, use the 100GBASE-LR4 optical module.
3. If the total receive optical power P is less than –4 dBm, use 100GBASE-ER4. If 1 dBm ≤ P
≤ -4 dBm, add a 5 dB optical attenuator at the receive end of the 100GBASE-ER4 board. If P
is greater than 1 dBm, add a 10 dB optical attenuator at the receive end of the 100GBASE-
ER4 board.

3.4.13 100Gbps QSFP28 Optical Module

3.4.13.1 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial

Table 3-110 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial

specifications

Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-

MMF-850nm-0.1km-commercial

Part Number 02311NTY

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 148

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Model OMND10N13

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3bm, 100GBASE-SR4

Connector type MPO-12

Optical fiber type MMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <5x10E-5

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 103.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 0.07 km(OM3)

0.1 km(OM4)

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 850 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 2.4 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 3 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -8.4 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: -6.4 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 2 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 840 nm - 860 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -10.3 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 2.4 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 149

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value
NOTE
1. If the module needs to reach the nominal data, the board FEC function must be enabled.
2. The BER 5x10E - 5 is the data that is not enabled by FEC, so that 1x10E - 12 can be
reached after FEC .
3. The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. The optical power read by the
device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical power.

3.4.13.2 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1310nm-30km(NO FEC)-40km(FEC)-

commercial

Table 3-111 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1310nm-30km(NO FEC)-40km(FEC)-

commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-

SMF-1310nm-30km(NO
FEC)-40km(FEC)-commercial

Part Number 02312AUE

Model OSN030N05

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3ba, 100GBASE-ER4

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <5x10E-5

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 103.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 40 km(FEC)

30 km(NO FEC)

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 150

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Center wavelength [nm] 1295.56 nm

1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm

1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 2.9 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 4.5 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -2.5 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 0.1 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 8 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm

1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -21.4 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: -3.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
1. If the module needs to reach 40 km, the board FEC function must be enabled. Otherwise,
it can reach only 30 km.
2. The BER 5x10E - 5 is the data obtained with FEC not enabled. After FEC is enabled, 1x10E
- 12 can be reached.
3. In 30 km application, the BER can reach 1x10E - 12.
4. The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. The optical power read by the
device is the average value, not the OMA optical power.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.4.13.3 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-
commercial (02312BSS)

Table 3-112 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-

commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-

SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-
commercial

Part Number 02312BSS

Model OSN010N24

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3ba, 100GBASE-LR4

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 103.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1295.56 nm

1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm

1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 4.5 dBm

[dBm]

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 152

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 4.5 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -4.3 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: -1.3 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 4 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm

1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -8.6 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 4.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. The optical power read by the
device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical power.

3.4.13.4 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-
commercial (02313SWA)

Table 3-113 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-

commercial specifications
Item Value

Basic Information

Module name 100Gbps(4*25.7)-QSFP28-

SMF-1295.56~1309.14nm-10km-
commercial

Part Number 02313SWA

Model OSN010N24

Form factor QSFP28

Application standard IEEE 802.3ba, 100GBASE-LR4

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 153

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Connector type LC

Optical fiber type SMF

Bit error ratio (BER) <1x10E-12

Working case temperature [°C(°F)] 0°C to 70°C(32°F to 158°F)

DDM options SFF-8636

Environment standard RoHS

Security standard FCC Class B, IEC 60825-1 Class 1

ESD(HBM1) [V] 500 V

Transmission rate [bit/s] 103.125 Gbit/s

Target transmission distance [km] 10 km

Transmitter Optical Characteristics

Center wavelength [nm] 1295.56 nm

1300.05 nm
1304.58 nm
1309.14 nm

Tx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm

1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Maximum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: 4.5 dBm

[dBm]

Maximum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: 4.5 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (AVG) per lane: -4.3 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum Tx optical power (OMA) per lane: -1.3 dBm

[dBm]

Minimum extinction ratio [dB] 4 dB

Receiver Optical Characteristics

Rx operating wavelength range [nm] 1294.53 nm - 1296.59 nm

1299.02 nm - 1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm - 1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm - 1310.19 nm

Rx sensitivity (AVG) [dBm] -

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Value

Rx sensitivity (OMA) [dBm] per lane: -8.6 dBm

Overload power (AVG) [dBm] per lane: 4.5 dBm

Overload power (OMA) [dBm] -

NOTE
The optical power calculation is based on the OMA value. The optical power read by the
device is the average optical power, not the OMA optical power.

3.5 Cables

3.5.1 Power Cable

This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the power cable.

3.5.1.1 DC Power Cables

Power cables need to be produced on site. The power cables are made of DC
connectors, single cord end terminals, and wires. The technical specifications of
the power cable are listed in Table 3-114.

Table 3-114 Technical specifications of the power cable

Item Wire Related Terminal Related
Parameter Parameter

4 mm2 power cable and terminal Electronic|Electric Naked Crimping

Cable,450V/ Terminal,OT,6mm
750V,H07Z-K 2,M8,Tin

UL3386,4mm2,Blu Plating,Insulated
e,45A,LSZH Ring
Cable,VDE,UL Terminal,12~10A
Electronic|Electric WG,yellow
Cable,450V/ Common
750V,H07Z-K Terminal,Conduct
UL3386,4mm2,Bla or Cross Section
ck,45A,LSZH 6mm2,Length
Cable,VDE,UL 20mm,Insertion
Depth
12mm,Black

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 155

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Wire Related Terminal Related

Parameter Parameter

6 mm2 power cable and terminal Electronic|Electric Naked Crimping

Cable,450V/ Terminal,OT,6mm
750V,H07Z-K 2,M8,Tin

UL3386,6mm2,Blu Plating,Insulated
e,58A,LSZH Ring
Cable,VDE,UL Terminal,12~10A
Electronic|Electric WG,yellow
Cable,450V/ Common
750V,H07Z-K Terminal,Conduct
UL3386,6mm2,Bla or Cross Section
ck,58A,LSZH 6mm2,Length
Cable,VDE,UL 20mm,Insertion
Depth
12mm,Black

3.5.1.2 AC Power Cables

This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the AC-input
power cable.
Table 3-115 describes the specifications of the AC Power Cables.

Table 3-115 AC Power Cables

Item Description

Cable Type (Power External Cable Suite, Power Cords All Over The World,
Cable) Class I Equipment With Connector C13, External Cable
Set

Cables and terminals

Figure 3-20 Connector C13

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 156

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.2 Chassis and Cabinet Ground Cable

This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the chassis and
cabinet ground cable.

3.5.2.1 Introduction

The chassis and cabinet ground cables are used to ground a chassis and a cabinet.
Before the delivery of a device, ground cables are correctly connected to the front,
rear, and side doors of the cabinet.

3.5.2.2 Structure

Figure 3-21 Ground cable

The connector of the chassi and cabinet ground cable is the same as the
connector of the DC-input power cable.

3.5.2.3 Technical Specifications

Table 3-116 lists the technical specifications and cabinet ground cable..

Table 3-116 Technical specifications and cabinet ground cable

Item Description

PGND cable Cable Electronic|Electric Cable,450V/750V,H07Z-K

type UL3386,6mm2,Yellow/Green,58A,LSZH
Cable,VDE,UL

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 157

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Description

Groundin Naked Crimping Terminal,OT,6mm2,M4,Tin

g Plated,Insulated Ring
terminal Terminal,12~10AWG,Yellow,Right angle
Naked Crimping Terminal,OT,6mm2,M8,Tin
Plating,Insulated Ring
Terminal,12~10AWG,yellow
Naked Crimping Connector,OT2,6mm2,M4,Tin
Plating,For OEM
Naked Crimping Terminal,OT,6mm2,M6,Tin
Plating,Insulated Ring
Terminal,12~10AWG,yellow

Fireproof class CM

3.5.3 Console Port Cable

This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the console
interface cable.

3.5.3.1 Introduction

The console interface cable is used to connect the console interface on the NE40E-
F1A-14H24Q to the serial interface of the console to transmit configuration data
of the NE40E-F1A-14H24Q.

Figure 3-22 Console cable

One end of the console interface cable is an RJ45 connector, which is connected to
the standard serial port of the device. The other end has DB9 connector which is
connected to the serial interface on a computer. If a device uses a non-standard
console port, a serial adapter cable is required between the RJ45 connector and
the device.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.3.2 Structure

Figure 3-23 shows the structure of a console interface cable.Figure 3-24 shows a
standard serial cable, and Table 3-117 shows the pin assignment on the console
interface cable.

Figure 3-23 Console interface cable

Figure 3-24 Standard serial cable (04040838: Traditional Signal,Serial Port

Cable,3m,D9F,CC2P0.32PWG1U,MP8-VI,S3026V)

1. DB9 female 2. Network interface RJ45 W communication cable

Table 3-117 Pin assignment on the console interface cable

DB9 Direction RJ45 Signal Color

X1.2 <- X2.3 RXD(Receive Black

Data)

X1.3 -> X2.6 TXD(Transmit Brown

Data)

X1.5 — X2.5 GND Red

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 159

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

A serial adapter cable features a network interface (used to connect to a standard

console cable) at one end and an RJ45 connector (used to connect to a router) at
the other end.

Figure 3-25 shows a serial adapter cable, and Table 3-118 describes its
connections.

Figure 3-25 Serial adapter cable (04070730: Traditional Signal Cable,0.3m,MP8-

II,CC4P0.5GY(S),MP8(S)-III,Serial adapter cable)

1 RJ45 connector (network 2 Network interface W communication cable

interface connector)

Table 3-118 Connections of a serial adapter cable

Start End Color Relationship

X1.4 X2.5 White/Green Twisted

X1.5 X2.6 Green

X1.8 X2.3 White/Blue -

3.5.3.3 Technical Specifications

Table 3-119 lists the technical specifications of the console interface cable.

Table 3-119 Technical specifications of the console interface cable

Item Description

Connector X1 Cable connector-D style-9PIN-female

Connector X2 Network interface connector-crystal connector-8PIN-8bit-

shielded plug

Cable type Twisted-Pair Cable,UL2464,0.32mm,28AWG,2 Pairs,PANTONE

WARM GRAY 1U,for OEM

Number of 4
cores

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 160

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Item Description

Fireproof VW-1
level

Available 3m
length

3.5.4 Clock Cable

This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the clock cable.

3.5.4.1 Introduction

A clock cable is used to connect the clock interface on the NE40E-F1A-14H24Q to

the clock interface on another device. In the case of the NE40E-F1A-14H24Q be
equipped with one , the NE40E-F1A-14H24Q can receive one channel 2-Mbit/s
clock signals, one channel 2-MHz clock signals, one channel 1 PPS +TOD time
signals, or one channel of input and one channel of output DCLS time signals
from the upstream device and provides one channel 2-Mbit/s clock signals, one
channel 2-MHz clock signals, one channel 1 PPS +TOD time signals, or one
channel of input and one channel of output DCLS time signals to the downstream
device. In the case of the NE40E-F1A-14H24Q be equipped with , the NE40E-
F1A-14H24Q can receive two channels 2-Mbit/s clock signals, two channels 2-
MHz clock signals, two channels 1 PPS +TOD time signals, or two channels of
input and two channels of output DCLS time signals from the upstream device
and provides two channels 2-Mbit/s clock signals, two channels 2-MHz clock
signals, two channels 1 PPS +TOD time signals, or two channels of input and two
channels of output DCLS time signals to the downstream device.
One end of the clock cable is an RJ45 connector connected to the clock interface
on the and the other end is connected to the clock interface on an external device.
The connector on the other end needs to be prepared as required on site.
An RJ45 connector is used together with the 120-ohm trunk cable.

NOTE

The wire sequence of a trunk cable used as a clock cable differs from the wire sequence of
an ordinary twisted cable.

3.5.4.2 Structure

120-ohm trunk cable

The 120-ohm trunk cable adopts the RJ45 connector.Figure 3-26 shows the
structure of the 120-ohm trunk cable.

Figure 3-26 120-ohm trunk cable

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 161

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Table 3-120 shows the pin assignments on the 120-ohm trunk cable.

Table 3-120 Pin assignments of the 120-ohm trunk cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship

X1.5 X2.2 Twisted

X1.4 X2.1

X1.2 X2.5 Twisted

X1.1 X2.4

X1.3 X2.7 Twisted

X1.6 X2.8

X1.7 X2.3 Twisted

X1.8 X2.6

3.5.4.3 Technical Specifications

Table 3-121 lists the technical specifications of the 120-ohm trunk cable.

Table 3-121 Technical specifications of the 120-ohm trunk cable

Item Description

120- Connector Network interface connector-8 PIN-8 bit-shielded-

ohm crystal model plug
cable
Type Cable,120ohm,1E1,0.4mm,MP8-
II,120CC4P0.4P430U(S),MP8-II,Expert 2.0

Length 3 m (9.84 ft), 15 m (49.21 ft), 30 m (98.42 ft), 60 m

(196.85 ft) and 80 m (262.46 ft)

3.5.5 Ethernet Cable

Ethernet cables are classified into two types: straight-through cables and crossover
cables.

3.5.5.1 Introduction

Ethernet cable is of two types: the straight-through cable and the crossover cable.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 162

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Straight-through Cable
The straight-through cable is used to connect the Ethernet interfaces between the
following devices:
● A router and a hub
● A router and an Ethernet switch
● A computer and an Ethernet switch
● A computer and a hub

Crossover Cable
The crossover cable is used to connect the Ethernet interfaces between the
following devices:
● A router and a router
● A router and a computer
● A hub and a hub
● A hub and a switch
● A switch and a switch
● A computer and a computer

3.5.5.2 Structure

As shown in Figure 3-27, the straight-through cable and the crossover cable are
standard shielded network cables, and uses an RJ45 connector shown in Figure
3-28.

Figure 3-27 Network cable

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 163

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

1. Connector - RJ45 2. Label 1 3. Main label 4. Label 2

Figure 3-28 RJ45 connector

Table 3-122 and Table 3-123 show the pin assignments of the straight-through
cable and the crossover cable respectively.

Table 3-122 Pin assignments of the straight-through cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relationship

X1.2 X2.2 Orange Twisted

X1.1 X2.1 White/orange

X1.6 X2.6 Green Twisted

X1.3 X2.3 White/green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted

X1.5 X2.5 White/blue

X1.8 X2.8 Brown Twisted

X1.7 X2.7 White/brown

Table 3-123 Pin assignments of the crossover cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relationship

X1.6 X2.2 Orange Twisted

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 164

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relationship

X1.3 X2.1 White/orange

X1.2 X2.6 Green Twisted

X1.1 X2.3 White/green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted

X1.5 X2.5 White/blue

X1.8 X2.8 Brown Twisted

X1.7 X2.7 White/brown

3.5.5.3 Technical Specifications

Table 3-124 and Table 3-125 show the technical specifications of the straight-
through cable and crossover cable respectively.

Table 3-124 Technical specifications of the straight-through cable

Item Description

Connector X1/X2 Network port connector-crystal connector-8PIN-8bit-shield-

plug-24-26AWG-CAT 6/SFTP network cable

Cable type Communication cable-100±15ohm-shielded enhanced 5

types-CAT5E SFTP 24AWG-8 core PANTONE 445U

Number of cores 8

Fireproof class CM

Available length 5 m (16.40 ft), 10 m (32.81 ft), 20 m (65.62 ft), and 30 m

(98.42 ft)

Table 3-125 Technical specifications of the crossover cable

Item Description

Connector X1/X2 Network port connector-crystal connector-8PIN-8bit-shield-

plug-24~26AWG-CAT 6/SFTP network cable

Cable type Communication cable-100±15ohm-shielded enhanced 5

types-CAT5E SFTP 24AWG-8 core PANTONE 646U

Number of cores 8

Fireproof class CM

Available length 5 m (16.40 ft) and 30 m (98.42 ft)

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 165

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.6 Optical Fiber

This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the optical fiber.

3.5.6.1 Introduction

Table 3-126 lists the types of optical fibers that the NE40E-F1A-14H24Q uses.

Table 3-126 Types of optical fibers

No. Description Local Remote Cable Mode

Connector Connector

1 Fiber LC/UPC FC/UPC Single-mode

connecting an
interface board
to the ODF

2 Fiber LC/UPC LC/UPC or SC/UPC Single-mode /

connecting multi-mode
interface boards

3 Fiber LC/UPC LC/UPC or SC/UPC Single-mode /

connecting an multi-mode
interface board
to another
device

NOTICE

The optical transmission module of the multi-transverse mode needs to be

connected to the multi-mode fiber. The optical transmitting module in single-
longitudinal or multi-longitudinal mode needs to be connected to the single-mode
fiber.

3.5.6.2 Optical Connectors

The NE40E-F1A-14H24Q uses the LC/UPC optical connector.

The outlines and operations of each connector as well as a brief description of

how to install and uninstall them are described in the following sections.

LC/UPC Optical Connector

Figure 3-29 shows the outline of the LC/UPC optical connector.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 166

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Figure 3-29 LC/PC optical connector

The plugging/unplugging of an LC/UPC optical interface only needs an axial

operation, that is, a push/pull in line with the cable, instead of a rotation.

The operation procedures and precautions are as follows:

● To insert, carefully align the head of the fiber jumper with the optical
interface and push in the fiber using appropriate force.
● To remove, press the clip and slightly push in the fiber connector, and then
pull it out.

3.5.6.3 Technical Specifications

Table 3-127 shows the technical specifications of the optical fiber.

Table 3-127 Technical specifications of the optical fiber

Item Description

Fiber transmission mode Single-mode/Multi-mode

Fiber connector 1 LC/UPC and SC/UPC

Fiber connector 2 LC/UPC, SC/UPC and FC/UPC

Fiber outer diameter 2 mm (0.08 in.)

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 167

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

3.5.7 Breakout Fibers

This section describes the positioning, usage scenario, structure, and technical
specifications of breakout fibers.

Positioning
Breakout fibers are used to flexibly allocate bandwidth resources to routers. They
cooperate with a breakout optical module to convert an MPO interface into
multiple LC interfaces to facilitate fiber layout.

Usage Scenario
The breakout function applies to a scenario where bandwidth resources are
unevenly allocated between two routers at different levels. In comparison with
breakout boxes, breakout fibers implement the following functions:
● Loosen fiber layout.
● Extend the cabling distance.

Fiber Structure
To insert a breakout optical module (multimode and short transmission distance)
into a board, use an MPO-LC fiber to directly connect the board and the optical
module.

Figure 3-30 MPO-LC fiber structure

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 168

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

NOTE

If the X1 end interface is Down but the X2 end interfaces are Up, check the X1 end status.
● Check whether the X1 end interface supports the breakout function. If the X1 end
interface does not support the breakout function, replace it with another interface that
supports the breakout function.
● Check whether the X1 end interface is in the breakout state. If the X1 end interface is
not in the breakout state, configure the interface to be in the breakout state.

Technical Specifications
Table 3-128 lists the breakout fibers supported by the NE40E-F1A-14H24Q.

Table 3-128 Breakout fibers supported

Type BOM Number Offi Mode
cial
Na
me

Optical Cable 14132537 SS- Multimode

Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/ OP-
PC,Multi-mode,5m,8 MP
cores,0/1m,GJFH-8A1a. O1
2(OM3),3.5mm,2mm,L 2-4*
SZH,43mm Short DLC
MPO,Bending -
insensitive M-5

Optical Cable 14132537-005 SS- Multimode

Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/ OP-
PC,Multi-mode,15m,8 MP
cores,0/1m,GJFH-8A1a. O1
2(OM3),3.5mm,2mm,L 2-4*
SZH,43mm Short DLC
MPO,Bending -
insensitive M-1
5B

Optical Cable 14132537-006 SS- Multimode

Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/ OP-
PC,MULTI- MP
MODE,30m,8 O1
CORES,0/1m,GJFH-8A1 2-4*
A.2(OM3),3.5MM,2mm DLC
,LSZH,43MM SHORT -
MPO,BENDING M-3
INSENSITIVE 0

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 169

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 3 Hardware Description

Type BOM Number Offi Mode

cial
Na
me

Optical Cable 14132537-001 SS- Multimode

Parts,MPO/PC,4DLC/ OP-
PC,Multi-mode,100m,8 MP
cores,0/1m,GJFH-8A1a. O1
2(OM3),3.5mm,2mm,L 2-4*
SZH,43mm Short DLC
MPO,Bending -
insensitive M-1
00

3.6 More Conference

● Basic Router Hardware Concept - Optical Fibers and Modules
● Quick Cable Connection Guide

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 170

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4 Hardware Installation and Parts

Replacement

4.1 Installation Guide

4.2 Parts Replacement

4.1 Installation Guide

4.1.1 Safety Precautions

This document provides safety precautions for installing, operating, and
maintaining the device.

4.1.1.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols

When installing or maintaining the device, strictly follow the precautions indicated
by alarm and safety symbols on the device to prevent personal injury and device
damage. This section describes the alarm and safety symbols on the device and
their meanings.

Alarm and Safety Symbols and Their Meanings

Table 4-1 lists the alarm and safety symbols on the device and their meanings.

Table 4-1 Alarm and safety symbols on the device and their meanings

Symbol Description

ESD Protection Symbol

Indicates that the device is static-sensitive.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 171

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Symbol Description

Chassis Grounding Symbol

Indicates the position of a grounding
terminal. If the device is installed in a 19-
inch cabinet, it is recommended that you
use the grounding point indicated by this
symbol.

Chassis Grounding Symbol

Indicates the position of a grounding
terminal. If the device is installed in a
cabinet other than the 19-inch cabinet, it is
recommended that you use the grounding
point indicated by this symbol.

Fan Warning Symbol

Indicates hazardous moving parts. Keep
your fingers and other body parts away
from fan blades when the fan is running.

Operation Warning Symbol

Indicates precautions for handling a power
supply board.

Overheat Warning Symbol

Indicates scalding and overheat risks.

4.1.1.2 General Safety Precautions

This section describes safety precautions for selecting measuring and testing
instruments during the installation, operation, and maintenance of the device.

Safety Precautions
To ensure human and device safety, follow all safety precautions indicated by
symbols on the device and those provided in this document.
The "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" sections in this document are
supplements to universal safety precautions and do not represent all safety
precautions.

Local Laws and Regulations

Follow local laws and regulations when performing operations on the device. The
safety precautions provided in this document are only supplements to the local
safety regulations.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 172

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

General Installation Requirements

Personnel who plan to install, operate, or maintain the device need to receive a
thorough training, understand all necessary safety precautions, and be able to
correctly perform all operations.

● Only trained and qualified personnel are permitted to install, operate, and
maintain the device.
● Only qualified personnel are permitted to remove safety facilities and
overhaul the device.
● Only personnel authenticated or authorized by Huawei are permitted to
replace the device or its parts (including software).
● Any fault or error that might cause safety problems must be reported
immediately to a supervisor.

Grounding Requirements
The following requirements apply only to devices that need to be grounded:

● When installing the device, connect the grounding cables first; when removing
the device, disconnect the grounding cables at last.
● Ensure that the grounding conductor is intact.
● Do not perform operations on the device before the grounding conductor is
installed.
● The device must always be connected to the protection ground (PGND).
Check the electrical connections of the device before performing operations
on the device, and ensure that the device is properly grounded.

Personal Safety
● Do not perform operations on the device or adjust cables during
thunderstorms.
● In a thunderstorm, disconnect the AC power connector and avoid using any
fixed terminals or touching any terminals or antenna connectors.
NOTE

The preceding requirements apply to fixed wireless station terminals.

● To avoid electric shocks, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuit
terminals to telecommunication network voltage (TNV) circuit terminals.
● Do not look into an optical port without eye protection. Otherwise, the laser
radiation may injure your eyes.
● Always take precautions against ESD whenever you perform operations on the
device. For example, wear an ESD coat, a pair of ESD gloves, or an ESD wrist
strap, and remove conductive objects like jewelry and watch. Otherwise, you
may get an electric shock or burn.
● In case of fire, leave the building or site where the device is located, and press
the fire alarm button or dial the fire emergency telephone number. Do not
enter the building on fire again in any case.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 173

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Device Safety
● Before any operation, ensure that the device is fixed firmly on the floor or any
other stable object, such as a wall or installation rack.
● When the device is running, ensure that the ventilation vent is not blocked.
● When installing a panel, use a tool to tighten the screws.
● After installing the device, remove the packing materials from the equipment
area.

Condensation Prevention
● Before installing the equipment, ensure that no condensation is on the
equipment. Otherwise, the equipment may fail to be powered on.
● If the indoor and outdoor temperature difference is 15°C or more, wait eight
hours after moving devices to the equipment and then install them.
● Generally, when the outdoor humidity is greater than 80% and the indoor and
outdoor temperature difference is greater than 5°C, condensation forms. In
highly humid weather, before installing a device or board, you are advised to
remove the package inside an equipment room and check whether
condensation forms as follows: Touch the surface of the device or board with
dry fingers or ESD gloves to check whether water marks exist. If they do,
condensation forms, and the device or board must be kept in the equipment
room for 8 hours before being powered on.
NOTE

If the temperature difference is undetermined, wait one night before installing the
equipment.

4.1.1.3 Electrical Safety

This section describes safety precautions for high voltage, thunderstorms, high
leakage current, power cables, fuses, and electrostatic discharge.

High Voltage

DANGER

● Direct contact with a high-voltage power source or indirect contact through

damp objects can be fatal.
● Non-standard and incorrect high-voltage operations may result in fire, electric
shock, or other accidents.

Thunderstorm
This requirement applies only to wireless base stations or devices with antenna
feeders.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 174

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

DANGER

High voltage and AC-related operations, or operations on a mast or steel tower

are prohibited during a thunderstorm.

High Leakage Current

CAUTION

To ensure personal and device safety, ground the device before powering it on.

If a high leakage current symbol is labeled near the power terminal of the device,
ground the protection ground terminal before connecting it to an AC input power
supply. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock caused by leakage current.

Power Cables

DANGER

Do not install or remove power cables when the power is on. Transient contact
between the core of a power cable and a conductor may generate electric arcs or
sparks that can cause fire and hurt human eyes.

● Power off the device before installing or removing power cables.

● Confirm that the label on a power cable is correct before connecting the
power cable.

Fuses

CAUTION

If a fuse needs to be replaced, ensure that the new fuse is of the same type and
specification.

Electrostatic Discharge

NOTICE

The static electricity generated by human bodies may damage the electrostatic-
sensitive components, such as large-scale integrated (LSI) circuits, on boards.

● Static electromagnetic fields resulting from conditions such as human body

movement, friction between the body and clothes, friction between shoes and
the floor, and contact with plastic articles do not disappear before electric
discharge.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 175

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● To prevent the device and its electrostatic-sensitive components (such as

circuit boards and ASICs) from being damaged by the static electricity of
human body, wear an ESD wrist strap that is properly grounded before
touching them.
Figure 4-1 shows how to wear an ESD wrist strap.

Figure 4-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

4.1.1.4 Precautions for Connecting a Computer to the Device

This section describes safety precautions for selecting measuring and testing
instruments during the installation, operation, and maintenance of the device.

Maintenance Terminal that Can Be Grounded (Desktop Computer)

A desktop maintenance terminal has a metal shell. Before connecting a desktop
maintenance terminal to a monitored device, you are advised to add an auxiliary
ground cable between them to enhance the equipotential connection. Figure 4-2
shows the grounding of a desktop maintenance terminal.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 176

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-2 Schematic diagram for grounding a desktop maintenance terminal

NOTE

On the maintenance terminal side, connect the auxiliary ground cable to the metal shell of
the terminal. You can connect the cable to a screw on the metal shell.
On the monitored device side, try to connect the auxiliary ground cable to the ground
terminal on the device or the supporting stand nearby first. If the two ground terminals are
unavailable, connect the auxiliary ground cable to the protection ground bar nearby in the
equipment room.
It is advisory to use a three-core power cable that contains a PE wire as the AC power cable
for the maintenance terminal. Collect the AC power cable to the AC power socket in the
equipment room.

Maintenance Terminal that Cannot Be Grounded (Portable Computer)

A maintenance terminal that does not have a metal shell, such as a portable
computer, cannot directly establish an equipotential connection with a monitored
device. In this case, take the following measures:
● After the portable computer is powered on and powered by batteries inside
the computer, use a cable to connect the computer to the monitored device.
● Wait for the connection between the maintenance terminal and monitored
device to be established and both of them enter the debugging state.
● If the portable computer has low battery and needs to be supplied with
external AC power after the preceding steps are complete, try to connect the
portable computer to the AC power socket used by the monitored device first.
If this is impossible, connect the portable computer to an AC power socket
located elsewhere in the equipment room.

4.1.1.5 Inflammable Environment

This section describes precautions for safe operating environments.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 177

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

DANGER

Do not place the device in an environment that has inflammable and explosive air
or gas. Do not perform any operation in such an environment.

Any operation on electronic devices in a flammable environment may cause a

severe hazard.

4.1.1.6 Batteries

DANGER

This section describes safety precautions for handling VRLA batteries and lithium
batteries.

This section describes the precautions for handling VRLA batteries.

4.1.1.6.1 VRLA Batteries

DANGER

Before handling VRLA batteries, ensure that you have read the safety precautions
carefully and understand connection methods for VRLA batteries.

● Inappropriate handling of VRLA batteries may cause hazards. When handling

VRLA batteries, avoid short-circuits and electrolyte overflow or leakage.
● Electrolyte overflow may damage the device, as it can corrode metal parts
and ultimately cause board damage.
● A VRLA battery contains a great deal of energy. Inappropriate operations may
cause a short-circuit, resulting in serious personal injuries.

Preventive Measures
When installing and maintaining VRLA batteries, pay attention to the following:

● Use special insulated tools.

● Wear an eye protector and take effective protection measures.
● Wear rubber gloves and a protective suit to prevent hazards caused by
electrolyte overflow.
● When carrying a VRLA battery, ensure that its electrodes are upward. Avoid
leaning or reversing the battery.
● Switch off the power supply during battery installation and maintenance.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 178

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Battery Short Circuit

DANGER

A battery short circuit may cause personal injuries. Although the voltage of an
ordinary VRLA battery is low, the instantaneous high current caused by a short-
circuit releases a surge of energy.

Avoid any battery short-circuits caused by metal objects. If possible, disconnect the
battery in use before performing other operations.

Harmful Gas

NOTICE

Do not use unsealed VRLA batteries. Place and secure VRLA batteries horizontally
to prevent device inflammation or corrosion due to flammable gas emitted from
the batteries.

VRLA batteries in use can release flammable gas. Take ventilation and fireproofing
measures at sites where VRLA batteries are used.

Battery Temperature

NOTICE

High battery temperature may result in battery distortion, damage, and electrolyte
overflow.

When the battery temperature is higher than 60°C, check whether electrolyte
overflows. If electrolyte overflows, take proper measures promptly.

Battery Leakage

NOTICE

When the electrolyte overflows, absorb and neutralize the electrolyte immediately.

Pay attention to personal safety when moving batteries with electrolyte leakage.
In the case of an electrolyte overflow, immediately use the following substances to
neutralize and absorb the leaked electrolyte:
● Sodium bicarbonate (baking soda): NaHCO3
● Sodium carbonate (calcined soda): Na2CO3

Follow instructions provided by related battery vendors when using these

materials for absorption and neutralization.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 179

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

If you are exposed to the battery electrolyte accidentally, immediately rinse with
clean water and seek medical care if the situation is serious.

4.1.1.6.2 Lithium Batteries

This section describes safety precautions for handling lithium batteries.

CAUTION

Using lithium batteries of an incorrect type may cause explosion.

● Replace a used lithium battery with one of the same type or a substitute
recommended by the manufacturer.
● Dispose the used battery according to instructions from the manufacturer.
● Do not throw lithium batteries into fire.

4.1.1.7 Radiation
This section describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers.

4.1.1.7.1 Electromagnetic Exposure

This section describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure.

CAUTION

Radio-frequency signals with high intensity are harmful to human body.

Before installing or maintaining an antenna on a tower or mast with a large

number transmit antennas, contact the related personnel to shut down these
antennas.
A working base transceiver station (BTS) produces electromagnetic radiation
(radiation hazard). Read the suggestions for safe operations before installing and
performing operations on a BTS. Comply with the local regulations when installing
a BTS.

4.1.1.7.2 Forbidden Areas

This section describes requirements for forbidden areas.
● Antennas must be installed in areas where the electromagnetic radiation level
is allowed to exceed the maximum permissible exposure limits (PELs) and
where the public have no access.
● Before entering such an area, determine where the electromagnetic radiation
is beyond the specified range and ask the related personnel to shut down the
transmitters. A forbidden area may not exist. If it exists, it should be within 10
meters away from antennas.
● A physical barrier and an eye-catching warning sign must be posted in each
forbidden area.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 180

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.1.1.7.3 Lasers
This section describes safety precautions for lasers.

CAUTION

When handling optical cables, do not look into optical ports without eye
protection.

Laser transceivers are used in optical transmission systems and associated test
tools. The laser emitted by bare optical fibers or connector ports has a high power
density and is invisible to naked eyes. Directly looking into optical ports without
eye protection will cause eye injuries.

Generally, looking at an exposed optical fiber terminal or a damaged fiber from a

distance of more than 150 mm does not cause eye injuries even without eye
protection. If you, however, look at an optical fiber terminal using an optical
instrument, such as a microscope, magnifier, or eye loupe, eye injuries may occur.

Safety Instructions for Lasers

Follow these instructions to avoid laser radiation hazards:

● Ensure that all operations are performed by authorized personnel who have
competed required training courses.
● Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when handling lasers or optical fibers.
● Switch off the optical source before disconnecting optical fiber connectors.
● Do not look at the terminal of an exposed optical fiber or an open connector
when you are not sure whether the optical source is switched off or not.
● Use an optical power meter to measure the optical power and ensure that the
optical source is switched off.
● When opening the front door of an optical transmission system, protect
yourself against laser radiation.
● Do not use an optical instrument, such as a microscope, magnifier, or eye
loupe, to look at optical fiber connectors or terminals.

Instructions for Fiber Handling

Follow these instructions before handling fibers:

● Optical fibers must be cut and spliced by trained personnel.

● Before cutting or splicing an optical fiber, ensure that the fiber is disconnected
from the light source. After disconnecting an optical fiber, cap the fiber
connectors.

4.1.1.8 Working at Heights

This section describes safety precautions for working at heights.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 181

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

CAUTION

When working at heights, take proper measures to prevent objects from falling.

The instructions for working at heights are as follows:

● Take required training courses before working at heights.
● Carry operation machinery and tools safely and prevent them from falling
down.
● Take safety measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt.
● Wear warm clothes when working at heights in cold areas.
● Confirm that the hoisting equipment are in good condition before working at
heights.

4.1.1.8.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects

This section describes safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects during the
installation, operation, and maintenance of the device.

CAUTION

Do not walk under the arm or lifted object when a heavy object is being lifted.

● Ensure that the personnel for operating hoisting machinery have taken
required training courses and obtained qualifications.
● Ensure that the hoisting tools to be used are complete and in good condition.
● Ensure that the hoisting tools are fixed to a fixture or wall with good weight-
bearing capacity.
● Issue orders with short and explicit words to avoid misoperation.
Ensure that the angle formed by two cables does not exceed 90°, as shown in
Figure 4-3.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 182

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-3 Hoisting a heavy object

4.1.1.8.2 Using Ladders

This section describes safety precautions for using ladders.

Checking Ladders
● Confirm that a ladder is in good condition before using it.
● Ensure that you know the maximum weight that the ladder can support.
Avoid overweighting the ladder.

Placing Ladders
Maintaining a slant angle of 75° for the ladder is recommended, as shown in
Figure 4-4. You can measure the gradient of the ladder with a right angle ruler or
with arms. To prevent the ladder from sliding, place the wider feet of the ladder at
the bottom, or take protective measures on the base part of the ladder. Ensure
that the ladder is placed securely.

Figure 4-4 Slanting a ladder

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 183

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Climbing Ladders
When climbing a ladder, follow the following instructions:
● Ensure that the gravity center of your body does not deviate from the ladder
edge.
● Before performing any operations, keep your balance on the ladder to reduce
risks and ensure safety.
● Do not climb higher than the fourth highest step (counted top down) of the
ladder.
If you want to climb up a roof, ensure that the vertical height between the ladder
and the roof is no less than one meter, as shown in Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-5 Vertical height between the ladder top and the roof being one meter

4.1.1.9 Mechanical Safety

This section describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects,
handling fans, and carrying heavy objects.

Drilling Holes

CAUTION

Do not drill holes on the cabinet without permission. Drilling holes that do not
meet the requirements may affect the electromagnetic shielding performance and
damage cables inside the cabinet. In addition, if the metal filings fall into the
cabinet, circuit boards may encounter short-circuits.

● Before drilling holes on the cabinet, move away cables inside the cabinet first.
● During the drilling, wear a pair of eye-protective glasses to prevent eye
injuries caused by flying metal filings.
● Wear protective gloves when drilling holes.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 184

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Take measures to prevent metal filings from falling into the cabinet. After
drilling holes, clean up the metal filings in a timely manner.

Sharp Objects

CAUTION

When carrying a device by hands, wear protective gloves to avoid injuries by sharp
objects.

Fans
● When replacing a component, place the component, screws, and tools
properly to prevent objects from falling into running fans. Otherwise, the fans
and devices will be damaged.
● When replacing parts near a fan, keep your fingers and parts away from fan
blades before the fan is powered off and stops running.

Carrying Heavy Objects

When carrying heavy objects, wear protective gloves to prevent your hands from
injury.

CAUTION

● Before carrying a heavy object, well prepare yourself to avoid injury.

● When pulling out the chassis from the cabinet, pay attention to the unstable or
heavy devices installed on the cabinet to prevent injury.

● Generally, two persons are required to carry a chassis. Do not carry a heavy
chassis by yourself. When carrying a chassis, stretch your back and move
stably to avoid getting strained.
● When moving or lifting a chassis, hold the handles or the bottom of the
chassis. Do not hold the handles of the modules, such as power modules, fan
modules, and boards, installed in the chassis.

4.1.1.10 Others
This section describes the safety precautions for inserting and removing boards,
binding signal cables, and routing cables at a low temperature.

Inserting and Removing Boards

NOTICE

Before installing a board, wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves. Handle
the board gently to avoid distorting pins on the backplane.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 185

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Insert the board along the guide rail.

● Keep board circuits from contacting with each other to avoid short-circuits
and scratches.
● Do not touch circuits, components, connectors, or wiring grooves with bare
hands. Otherwise, electrostatic discharge generated by human body will
damage sensitive components.

Binding Signal Cables

NOTICE

Bind signal cables separately from high-current or high-voltage cables.

Routing Cables
At an extremely low temperature, violent shocks or vibrations may result in cracks
in the plastic cable sheath. To ensure safety, follow the following requirements:
● When installing cables, ensure that the ambient temperature is above 0°C.
● If cables are stored in a place where the temperature is below 0°C, move and
keep these cables in a place with room temperature for over 24 hours before
routing.
● Handle cables gently, especially in a low-temperature environment. Do not
perform any inappropriate operations, for example, directly pushing cables
down from vehicles.

4.1.2 Preparing for the Installation

Before installing the hardware, prepare the technical documents, tools and meters,
arrange for experienced installation engineers, check the installation environment,
and perform the unpacking check.

4.1.2.1 Preparing for Installation

This section describes the technical documents, tools and meters that need to be
available before the installation. It also describes the skills that the installation
engineers must possess, and the requirements that the installation engineers must
meet.

4.1.2.1.1 Preparing Technical Documents

Technical documents are a vital prerequisite for installing a cabinet successfully.
They are also the important information to be referred to during the installation.
● On-Site Survey Report. It is filled by the Huawei survey engineer during the
on-site survey.
● Other documents related to the engineering include the Contract Agreement
and the Packing List. They are provided by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. to
the customer when the device is delivered.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 186

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.1.2.1.2 Preparing Tools and Meters

The owner of installation needs to arrange the tools and meters for hardware
installation.

Context
Tools Preparation
Installation Related Material
1. PVC black insulation tape
2. Tie wrap
3. Binding tape
4. Heat shrink tube
5. Corrugated pipe
6. Label

4.1.2.1.3 Qualification of Installation Engineers

Installation engineers must possess the basic knowledge of safe operation. They
should receive the related training, should understand how to operate correctly,
and acquire corresponding operation qualification.
When arranging the installation engineers to perform this activity, the customer
needs to pay attention to the following points:
● The installation engineer must have been trained and certified by Huawei and
must understand the methods of installing and commissioning the system.
The installation engineer must obtain a qualification certificate before
installing and commissioning the device.
● The technical engineer of the customer must have received the basic training
conducted by Huawei and must understand the related methods of
installation and construction.
● The number of installation engineers should be based on the specific
engineering schedule and the installation environment. In general, arrange for
three to five installation engineers.

4.1.2.2 Environmental Requirements for Device Operation

This chapter describes the environmental requirements for device operation,
including the requirements for the environment of the equipment room and power
supply.

4.1.2.2.1 Requirements for Selecting a Site for Equipment Room

When designing a project, you should consider the communication network
planning and the technical requirements of the equipment. You should also
consider hydrographic, geological, seismic, power supply, and transportation
factors.
Construction, structure, heating and ventilation, power supply, lighting and fire
prevention of the equipment room should be designed by specialist construction

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 187

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

designers according to the environment requirements of the equipment. The

equipment room should also follow the relevant industrial, environment
protection, fire prevention, and civil defense regulations.
The equipment room should be located at a place free from high temperatures,
dust, toxic gases, explosive materials, or unstable voltage. Also ensure that the
equipment room is located away from sources of large vibrations, loud noises, and
power stations.
The specific requirements for selecting a site for equipment room are as follows:
● The room should be located at a distance of at least 5 km (3.11 mi.) from
heavy pollution sources such as smelteries and coal mines. It should be
located at a distance of at least 3.7 km (2.30 mi.) from medium pollution
sources such as chemical, rubber, and galvanization factories. It should be
located at a distance of at least 2 km (1.24 mi.) from light pollution sources
such as food processing factories. If these pollution sources cannot be
avoided, ensure that the equipment room is upwind of the pollution sources
and take extra measures to prevent the pollution from affecting the
equipment room.
● The room should be located away from livestock farms, or, if unavoidable,
upwind of the livestock farms. Do not use an old livestock room or fertilizer
warehouse as the equipment room.
● The air vent of the room should not be located near to the output of any
sewage works. Ensure that the equipment room is correctly pressurized so
that corrosive gasses are not drawn into the room.
● The room should be located away from industrial and heating boilers.
● You are recommended to locate the room in or above the second floor. If this
requirement cannot be met, the ground for equipment installation in the
room should be at least 600 mm (23.62 in.) above the maximum flood level
in the local record. The room should be at an altitude of lower than 3000 m
(118.11 in.).
● The room should be at least 3.7 km (2.30 mi.) away from the sea and salt
lakes. If this is not possible, the equipment room should be airtight with
cooling facilities. In addition, alkalized soil cannot be used as the construction
material. If this is not possible, the equipment must be suitable for use in wet
conditions.
● The equipment room should be strong enough to resist strong wind and
downpours.
● The room should be located away from large sources of dust or sand. If this is
unavoidable, the doors and windows of the equipment room must face away
from the source of dust or sand.

4.1.2.2.2 Equipment Room Layout

The equipment room is usually used to install mobile switching equipment,
telecom transmission equipment, and power supply equipment, as well as other
auxiliary equipment. To ensure easy maintenance and management, telecom
equipment can be placed in different rooms according to its function. Figure 4-6
shows the plane layout of the equipment room.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 188

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-6 Layout of the equipment room

The general layout principles of the equipment room are as follows:

● It should meet anticipated requirements for laying out and maintaining
communication cables and power cables.
● Cabling distance should be minimized, which eases cable maintenance,
reduces potential communication faults, and raises efficiency.

4.1.2.2.3 Construction Requirements for the Equipment Room

Table 4-2 lists the construction requirements for the equipment room.

Table 4-2 Construction requirements for the equipment room

Item Requirements

Area The area of the equipment room should be large enough to

accommodate not only the current equipment but also
equipment that is expected to be added in the future.

Height The minimum height of the equipment room indicates the

height below the beam or the ventilation pipe. The minimum
height of the equipment room should not be less than 3 m (9.84
ft).

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 189

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Item Requirements

Floor The floor in the equipment room must be semi-conductive and

dust-proof. A raised ESD floor is recommended. Make sure that
the raised floor tiles are fitted together tightly and that the
raised floor is sturdy. The horizontal tolerance of each square
meter should be less than 2 mm (0.08 in.). If raised floors are
unavailable, use static electricity conductive floor material, with
a volume resistivity of 1.0 x 107 ohms to 1.0 x 1010 ohms.
Ground the static electricity conductive floor material or raised
floor so that the static electricity can be conducted. You can
connect the floor with the ground unit using the current limiting
resistor and connection line. The resistance of the current
limiting resistor is 1 megohm.

Load-bearing Larger than 561 kg/m2 (0.80 bf/in2)

capacity

Door and The door of the equipment room should be 2 m (6.56 ft) high
windows and 1 m wide. One door is enough. Seal the doors and windows
with dust-proof plastic tape. Install the windows with double-
layer glass and ensure that they are sealed properly.

Wall surface Cover the walls with wallpaper or paint the walls with flat paint,
treatment but do not use pulverized paint.

Grooves Use grooves to arrange cables. The inner side of the grooves
must be smooth. The reserved length and width of the grooves,
and the number, position, and dimensions of the holes must
comply with the requirements of router arrangement.

Water pipe Service pipes, drainpipes, and storm sewers should not pass
through the equipment room. A fire hydrant should be in the
corridor or near the staircase. Do not place a fire hydrant in the
equipment room.

Internal Separate the area where the equipment is installed from the
partition wall equipment room door. The partition wall helps prevent dust
getting in.

Installation Install the air conditioner that it does not blow air directly onto
position of the device.
the air
conditioner

Other Do not use insulation materials that contain sulfur or chlorine.

requirements Polyethylene Foam (PEF) is recommended.
Ensure that the equipment room is free from fungus, mold, and
any other micro-organisms that may harm the equipment. Also
ensure that no rodents, such as mice, have access to the
equipment room.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 190

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-7 Internal partition wall inside the equipment room

4.1.2.2.4 Requirements for Temperature, Humidity, and Altitude

Proper temperature, humidity, and altitude must be ensured for the equipment
room. Table 4-3 lists the specific requirements.

Table 4-3 Requirements for temperature, humidity, and altitude

Item Requirements

Temperature Long-term -5°C to 45°C (DC/AC)

operation

Storage temperature -40°C (-40°F) to +70°C (158°F)

Relative Long-term 5% RH to 85% RH, non-condensing

humidity operation

Short-term 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing

operation

Storage relative humidity 0% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing

Long-term operation altitude Less than 3,000 m (9842.4 ft)

Storage altitude Less than 5,000 m (16404 ft)

NOTE

● The measurement point of the temperature and humidity is 1.5 m (4.92 ft) above the
floor and 0.4 m (1.31 ft) from the front of a cabinet. Before measuring temperature and
humidity, remove the protection panels at the front or back of the cabinet.
● Short-term operation means that the continuous working time does not exceed 96
hours and the accumulated time per year does not exceed 15 days.

Take the following measures to ensure that the preceding requirements can be
met:

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 191

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Use a temperature-control device no matter what the local climate is.

● In areas with low humidity, use a humidifier or regularly mop the ground with
water.
● In areas with high humidity, use a dehumidifier.

4.1.2.2.5 Requirements for Handling Corrosive Gases

The room must be free from corrosive gases, such as SO2, H2S, and NH3. Table
4-4 lists the requirements for corrosive gas concentrations. For details, see the
indoor requirements specified in the GR-63 standard.

Table 4-4 Requirements for corrosive gas concentrations

Chemically
Active
Substance Unit Concentration

SO2 ppb ≤ 50

H2S ppb ≤ 40

NH3 ppb ≤ 500

Cl2 ppb ≤5

Take the following measures to ensure that the preceding requirements can be
met:
● Avoid constructing the equipment room near a place where there is a high
concentration of corrosive gases, such as a chemical plant.
● Ensure the air intake vent of the room is always upwind of the pollution
source, and is far away from any sewers.
● Use environmental protection decoration materials. For example, use the
Polyethylene Foam (PEF) to replace the rubber and plastic foam.
● Do not place batteries together.
● Monitor the corrosive gas concentrations regularly.

4.1.2.2.6 Requirements for ESD Prevention

The absolute value of electrostatic voltage must be less than 1000 V. To achieve
this, take the following measures:
● Train operators on ESD prevention.
● Keep proper humidity in the equipment room to reduce the impact of static
electricity.
● Lay out ESD flooring in the equipment room.
● Put on ESD shoes and clothing before entering the equipment room.
● Use ESD tools, such as wrist straps, tweezers, and pullers.
● Ground all conductive materials in the room, including computer terminals.
Use ESD worktables.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 192

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Keep non-antistatic materials (such as common bags, foams, and rubbers) at

least 30 cm (0.98 ft) away from boards and ESD-sensitive components.

4.1.2.2.7 Electromagnetism Requirements for the Equipment Room

Electromagnetic interference can come from the equipment itself or from an
outside source. Electromagnetic interference negatively affects capacitance
coupling, inductance coupling, electromagnetic wave radiation, and common
impedance (including grounding system) coupling. To prevent the interference,
you should:
● Take effective measures against electricity net interference interfering with
power supply systems.
● Do not use the working ground of the equipment together with the
grounding or lightning protection grounding device of the power equipment.
Separate them as far as possible.
● Keep the equipment away from strong power wireless launchers, radar
launchers, and any other high-frequency and high-current equipment.
● Use electromagnetic shielding if necessary.

4.1.2.2.8 Requirements for Lightning-Proof Grounding

Table 4-5 lists the requirements for lightning-proof grounding.

Table 4-5 Requirements for lightning-proof grounding

Item Requirements

Construction Use reinforced concrete for the construction of the equipment

room.
Install a lightning-proof device like a lightning rod in the room.
The lightning-proof ground must be connected to the same
ground busbar as the protection ground of the room.

TN-S power Use a special power transformer for the telecommunication

system site. Use a metal jacket or steel tube to cover the power cables
before burying them under the ground. Ground both ends of
the metal jacket or steel tube nearby. Less than 15 m (49.21
ft) of the metal jacket of steel tube should be buried.
Install a gapless zinc oxide arrester to each of the three phase
lines at the low-voltage side of the AC power transformer. The
enclosure of the transformer, the neutral lines at the low-
voltage side, and the metal steel tubes of the power cables
that are connected to the enclosure of the transformer should
all be grounded nearby.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 193

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Item Requirements

Lightning Do not route the AC/DC power cables in/out the

arresters for communications site overhead.
power cables After the AC low-voltage power cables are led into the room,
install the lightning arrester for the power cables in the AC
voltage stabilizer and the AC power distribution panel (box).
Ground the arrester nearby.
After the DC power cable is led into the equipment room from
outdoors, install a power lightning protection device for the DC
power cable. The lightning protection device should be
grounded in proximity.
For the equipment room in a city, install the power supply
arrester with a nominal discharging current of no less than 20
kA. For the equipment room built in the suburbs subject to
lightning strikes, install the power supply arrester with a
nominal discharging current larger than 60 kA. For the
equipment room in a mountainous area subject to lightning
strikes, or in a detached high-rise building in a city, install a
power supply arrester with the nominal discharging current
larger than 100 kA.
The ground cable of the lightning arrester should be a
maximum of 1 m long.

DC power Connect the DC working ground (positive pole of the -48 V DC

distribution power supply or the negative pole of the 24 V DC power
grounding supply) with the indoor collective ground cable nearby. The
ground cable should meet the maximum load of the
equipment.
The power equipment must have a BGND cable, which can
connect the power equipment to the collective ground cable of
the telecommunication site (or the protection ground bar of
the equipment room).

Equipotential Ground the devices and auxiliary devices, such as mobile base
bonding station, transmission, switching equipment, power supply
equipment, and cable distribution frame, in the equipment
room. Connect all protection ground cables to the collective
protection ground bar. Connect all protection ground cables in
one equipment room to one protection ground bar.
Apply joint grounding to the working ground and protection
ground of devices, which means the two share one grounding
network.
The cabling tray, rack or shell, metal ventilation pipe, metal
door or window of the equipment should be grounded for
protection.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 194

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Item Requirements

General Do not connect the neutral line of the AC power cable with the
requirements protection ground of any telecom equipment in the equipment
for grounding room.
Do not install a fuse or switch on the ground cable.
All ground cables should be as short as possible, and should
not be coiled.

Grounding The grounding resistance must be lower than 1 ohm.

resistance The upper end of the ground busbar should be at least 0.7 m
(2.30 ft) over the ground. In cold areas, bury the ground
busbar below the frozen ground.
Measure the grounding resistance periodically to ensure
effective grounding.

Routing of Do not arrange the signal cables overhead in the equipment

signal cables room. All signal cables must be led into the site underground.
Use cables with a metal jacket or place them in a metal pipe if
they go into or come out of the equipment room.
Keep the ground cable of the lightning arrester as short as
possible. Ground any idle lines inside the cable in the
equipment room.

Collective Use a ground ring or ground bar for the collective ground
ground cable cable.
Do not use aluminum cables as ground cables. Adopt
measures to prevent electrification corrosion when connecting
different metal parts together.
Use a copper busbar with a cross-sectional area not less than
120 mm2 as the collective ground cable, or use galvanized flat
steel of the same resistance. Insulate the collective ground
cable from the reinforcing steel bars of the building.

Grounding The grounding lead-in should be a maximum of 30 m (98.42

lead-in ft) long. Use galvanized flat steel with cross-sectional area of
40 x 4 mm (0.16 in.) or 50 x 5 mm (0.20 in.).

4.1.2.2.9 Dust Resistance and Water Resistance

The protection rating of the equipment is IP20. A network cabinet installed
outdoors or in a corridor that is exposed to rain must meet the requirements of
IP55 rating protection at least.

Dustproof and Waterproof Capability of the Device

The protection rating of the equipment is IP20. (The first number "2" indicates
that the equipment can prevent a solid foreign object with the diameter larger
than 5 mm from entering the equipment. The second number "0" indicates that
the waterproof function is not provided.)

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 195

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Install the device in a place that is free from flooding and prevent foreign objects
such as screw and cable end from entering the heat-dissipation hole of the device.
Otherwise, the device may be burnt due to short circuit.

Outdoor Dustproof and Waterproof Requirement

If the network cabinet is installed outdoors or in a corridor that is exposed to rain,
the network cabinet must meet the requirements of IP55 rating protection at
least. ("IP" indicates International Protection Rating. The first number "5" refers to
the rating for preventing the solid particle from entering the network cabinet.
That is, ingress of dust is not totally prevented, but dust shall not penetrate in a
quantity to interfere with satisfactory operation of apparatus or to impair safety.
The second number "5" refers to the rating for preventing water from entering the
network cabinet. That is, water projected in jets against the enclosure from any
direction shall have no harmful effects.)

In regions with heavy dust, it is recommended that customers add air filters to
their customized network cabinets to improve the reliability of the network
cabinet.

Indoor Dustproof and Waterproof Requirement

In regions with heavy dust, it is recommended that customers add air filters to
their customized network cabinets to improve the reliability of the network
cabinet.

4.1.2.2.10 Requirements for Power Supply

This section describes the requirements for the power supply.

Requirements for AC Power Supply

An AC power supply that consists of mains electricity, uninterruptible power
supply (UPS), and self-supplied electric generator set can be used as an integrated
power supply. The AC power supply must feature simple connection line, safe
operation, flexible scheduling, and easy maintenance in addition to meeting the
requirements of site load.

Low voltage power should adopt three-phase five-wire mode or monophase three-
wire mode. Low voltage of AC power should be 110 V/127 V/220 V/380 V, and the
frequency is 50 Hz.

UPS is required as the AC potential power, and it should be the same phase as the
mains. The switching time of the UPS and mains should be less than 10 ms;
otherwise, the device will reboot or reset.

The working current and fault current of the device should be taken into account
when calculating the power distribution capacity in the equipment room. Ensure
that independent AC power protects independent devices. Configure the current
capacity of the protection switch of the equipment room to be higher than that of
the device.

Table 4-6 provides the voltage ranges of AC power for the device.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 196

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-6 Voltage range of AC power

Item Requirements

AC power capacity to -10% to +5% of the rated voltage

support the device

AC power capacity to -15% to +10% of the rated voltage

support the power
modules and important
buildings

AC frequency -15% to +10% of the rated voltage

Voltage waveform sine Within 5% of the rated current

distortion rate

The self-supplied electric generator set for a telecommunication office is an

automated generator set that must provide standard interfaces, use
telecommunication protocols, support remote communication and remote
management, and feature automatic input, removal, and supply.

AC power cables should accord with the following specifications:

● AC neutral uses the conductor with the same cross section as the phase line.
● AC wires are non-flammable. The layout of AC wires complies with local
regulations. Low-voltage power distribution rooms comply with local
regulations.

Recommendations for AC Power Supply

The following lists several recommendations for AC power supply.
● If the power voltage of the mains, which supplies power for the device
directly, exceeds the rated voltage by -10% to 5%, or exceeds the voltage
range that the device can support, a voltage regulating device or voltage
stabilizing device is required.
● If the mains does not supply power for the device directly, and the mains
voltage exceeds the rated voltage by -15% to 10%, or exceeds the voltage
range that the DC power supply device allows AC to input, a voltage
regulating device or voltage stabilizing device is required.
● A UPS power supply system or inverter power supply system is required to
prevent interruption or surge of AC power supply.
● When an abnormality occurs on the mains, the telecommunication office
should be equipped with a self-supplied electric generator set as a power
supply to prevent power supply interruption. The capacity should be 1.5 to 2
times the capacity that ensures uninterrupted AC power.
● Storage batteries are usually installed in parallel connection of two groups.
UPS storage batteries are generally installed in one group. UPS can adopt a
serial or parallel connection to provide the required redundancy. When an
inverter or a UPS is used, the active inverter is determined by the maximum
power and a backup inverter is required.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 197

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Requirements for DC Power Supply

The telecommunication site should receive stable and reliable DC power supply.
Deploy the power equipment near the telecom equipment so that the DC feeder is
as short as possible. To reduce power consumption and installation costs, the loop
voltage drop from the battery port to the equipment port should be less than 3.2
V.
For a communication site with heavy traffic or with more than two switching
systems, two or more independent power supply systems are required.
For a large-scale communication site, multiple power supply systems are
configured on different floors to supply power to different equipment rooms. For a
common communication site with medium traffic, a centralized power room or
battery room is configured. You can also use a distributed power supply. Use the
integrated power supply for an office with light traffic. Prevent the corrosive gas
released by the battery from corroding the circuit board.
Table 4-7 lists the specifications for DC power.

Table 4-7 Specifications for DC power

Item Requirements

Range of the -38 V to -72 V

-48 V input
voltage

DC power Greater than 1.5 times the rated current

capacity to
support the
surge current

Regulated If the AC input voltage is in the range of 85% to 110% of the

voltage rated value and the load current is in the range of 5% to 100%
precision of the rated value, the output voltage of the rectifier is an
integer in the range of -46.0 V to 56.4 V, with the regulated
voltage precision equal to or lower than 1%.

Overshoot Integral value of the DC output voltage ±5%

amplitude of
switch on/off

Peak-to-peak ≤ 200 mV
noise voltage

Dynamic The recovery time is less than 200 ms. The overshoot is in the
response range of the integral value of the DC output voltage ±5%.

Recommendations for DC Power Supply

The following lists several recommendations for DC power supply.
● Adopt a dispersed power supply. Use multiple DC power supply systems and
set power equipment in multiple positions.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 198

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Adopt the standard DC power supply system, and set the output voltage of
the communications equipment to be within the required range.
● Improve the reliability of the AC power supply system, and reduce the
capacity of storage batteries. For the small offices, add the capacity of storage
batteries if it is difficult to enhance the reliability of the AC power supply
system.
● The total capacity of the high-frequency switch rectifier must satisfy the
power of the communication loading and battery charging. Configure the
backup rectifier modules. If there are 10 or fewer active modules, configure
one backup module. If there are more than 10 active modules, configure one
backup module for every 10 active modules.
● Install the storage batteries in two or more groups. The capacity is
determined by the duration that the storage batteries supply power to the
load. For most offices, the batteries should be able to supply power for one
hour at least.

4.1.2.3 Unpacking and Checking the Products

This section describes the procedure and precaution for unpacking and checking
the products after the engineering is started.

4.1.2.3.1 Checking the Package Container

Before unpacking and checking the products, check whether the package
container is intact.

Procedure
Step 1 Unload the products.

NOTICE
When unloading the products, place the package containers in order. Make sure
that the product labels on the package containers are in the same direction. This
facilitates the checking.

Step 2 After unloading the products, check whether the total number of the products are
the same as the number indicated on the Packing List. Check whether the
destination of delivery is the same as the actual site for installation.

Condition Action

The total number of products are the Perform step 4.

same as the number indicated on the
Packing List, and the products are
delivered to the correct destination.

The total number of products are Perform step 3.

different from the number indicated
on the Packing List, or the products
are delivered to the wrong destination.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 199

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Step 3 The engineering supervisor must send the Cargo Inspection Feedback Form that is
confirmed and signed by the customer to the order management engineer in the
local Huawei representative office within three days. At the same time, stop
unpacking the products.
Step 4 Check whether the exterior of the package container is intact. Check whether the
package container is placed correctly during transportation.
Condition Action

The external package is intact. Unpack and check the products.

The exterior of the package container Perform step 5.

is seriously damaged or shows signs of
water penetration.

Step 5 Stop unpacking the products, trace the cause, report the problem to the order
management engineer of the local Huawei representative office, and wait for
further assistance.

NOTICE
To protect the device and trace the cause, transfer the unpacked device indoors to
ensure proper storage. Take photographs of the storage site, the device that is
rusted or corroded, the related package container, and the package materials.
Collect the photos and file them. Preserve the package container and package
materials that are unpacked.

----End

4.1.2.3.2 Unpacking the Wooden Case

In general, wooden cases are used to pack heavy goods such as racks, cabinets
and batteries. The package for a cabinet consists of wooden panels, steel edges,
tongues, and foam plates. If possible, move the wooden case into or near the
equipment room, and then unpack the cabinet to avoid damaging the cabinet
during transportation.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 200

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Prerequisites

NOTICE

● When carrying the cabinet, always hold the stronger part of the cabinet, such
as the support or the rack. Do not exert force on the parts that are relatively
weak, such as the cable support or the cable fixing beam. Otherwise, the
cabinet may get damaged or accidents may occur. Remove the backing blocks
from the rack only after the cabinet is carried to the installation site. The same
is to avoid damaging signal cables and boards when carrying the cabinet.
● If there are violent-strike sensing labels, check whether the label is red. If the
label is not red, you need not check the equipment. If the label is red, check
whether the equipment is damaged and maintain records.
● The wooden case must be positioned correctly. Do not place the wooden case
upside down. Otherwise, the device can get damaged severely.

Procedure
Step 1 Wear protective gloves.

Step 2 Place the wooden case in an even manner on the ground, and make sure that the
side with the pallet faces downwards.

Step 3 Insert one end of the spanner into the hole of the tongue on the cover of the
wooden case. Lift the spanner to straighten the tongue, as shown in Figure 4-8.
You can also use a screwdriver or a claw hammer to straighten the tongue.

Figure 4-8 Straightening the tongue

1 Steel edge 2 Wooden panel

3 Tongue 4 Spanner

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 201

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NOTICE

The edges of tongues are sharp and may injure your hand.

Step 4 After straightening all the tongues on the cover, remove the cover as shown in
Figure 4-9.

Figure 4-9 Removing the cover

Step 5 Straighten all the tongues that join the side wooden panels and remove the
wooden panels, as shown in Figure 4-10.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 202

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-10 Removing the side wooden panels

Step 6 Stand the cabinet. Remove the pallet, foam plates, and package bag.

NOTICE

Three to five persons are required to stand the cabinet. When standing the
cabinet, prevent the cabinet from tipping over, as this may cause injury to the
personnel who are handling it.

Step 7 Check the cabinet according to the following requirements:

● Check the appearance of the cabinet. Ensure that the exterior (especially the
bottom) of the cabinet is intact, free from water penetration, distortion, and
rust.
● Check the cabinet door. Ensure that the cabinet door can be opened and
closed normally.
● Check the surface of the cabinet. Ensure that the surface of the cabinet is
clean, neat and completely painted.
● Check the labels on the cabinet. Ensure that the labels on the cabinet are
correct, legible and complete.
----End

4.1.2.4 Checking the Boards

This section describes how to check the boards and the rules to be complied with.
Clean the chassis and cabinet before installing the boards. Wear an ESD wrist
strap and remove the board from the antistatic package. Check whether the board

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 203

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

name is consistent with the identifier on the package box, and whether any device
is damaged or any component is missing.

Check pins on the backplane of the chassis. The pins should be kept straight,
orderly, and clean. For the pins bent in the board slots on the backplane, repair
them.

The boards are sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). When handling boards,
observe the following rules:

● Check whether the device is securely grounded against requirements.

● Wear an ESD wrist strap during the installation.
● Ensure good contact of the metal tab of the wrist strap with your bare skin.
Insert the other end of the wrist strap into the grounding point on the device.
● Ensure that the wrist strap works in the normal state. Its resistance value
must be between 0.75 megohm and 10 megohm. If the service life (usually
two years) of the wrist strap expires or the resistance value fails to meet
requirements, replace it with another one.
● Avoid touching the board with your clothes, because the touch generates
static electricity that is beyond the protection scope of the wrist strap.
● Keep the board and other ESD sensitive parts to be installed in antistatic bags.
Place the removed boards and components on an antistatic pad or other
antistatic materials. Do not use non-antistatic materials such as white foams,
common plastic bags, or paper bags to pack boards or let them touch boards.
● Wear an ESD wrist strap when operating the ports of boards because they are
also ESD-sensitive. Discharge the static electricity of cables and protective
sleeves before connecting them to the ports.
● It is recommended that you reserve some materials that can hold boards such
as vacuum formed boxes and antistatic bags in the equipment room for later
use.

4.1.3 On-site Cable Assembly and Installation

This chapter describes how to assemble and install power cables, Ethernet cables,
and other cables.

4.1.3.1 Cable Assembling Precautions

Check the cables and connector components according to the following lists.

Checking Cables
● If the jacket or insulation layer of a cable is dirty, clean it before assembly.
● If the jacket or insulation layer of a cable has visible damage, irreparable
scuffing, or a defect, do not use the cable.
● If the shield layer of a cable is damaged, do not use the cable.
● If the jacket or insulation layer of a cable cracks after the cable is bent or
twisted, check whether the other cables have the same problem. If the other
cables are good, do not use this cable. If other cables have the same problem,
do not assemble these cables.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 204

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Checking Connectors
● Do not use the connectors with visible defects, damage, rust, or scuffing.
● Do not use the connectors if the pins or shells of the connectors are damaged.
● Do not use the connectors if there is dirt on the pins or in the jacks of the
connectors or if there are conductors between pins or between pins and the
shell.

Precautions for Assembly

● Use dedicated tools or tools delivered by Huawei and follow the correct
assembly methods.
● Hold the terminals of cables instead of pulling the cables when installing or
removing the cable components.
● Take the following precautions when cutting or peeling cables:
– Leave a little extra length when cutting cables.
– Coil cables that are longer than 2 m (6.56 ft.). Bind the cables using
bundling ropes. The inner diameter of the coil should be larger than 20
times the outer diameter of the cable.
– When peeling the jackets of cables, avoid damaging the shield layers
(braid or aluminum foil), insulation layers, core conductors, and other
jackets that do not need to be peeled.
– Clean the exposed jackets section (such as, the dead ends of power
cables). Cut all cables flush.
– Do not touch the core conductors of cables with your hands. Process the
conductor peeled from cables in time so that the surface of the conductor
does not need to be oxidized.
● Take the following precautions when crimping and connecting cables or
connectors:
– The terminals and conductors should be connected tightly after they are
crimped. They should not be moved or turned.
– Cut all the exposed copper wires.
– Try to avoid a second crimping of sleeves.
– Keep all the conductors clean and aligned.
NOTE

The connectors, cables, and tools provided by different vendors may differ. Figures in this
document are for reference only.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 205

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NOTICE

● The intra-building port(s) (list the port or ports) of the equipment or

subassembly is suitable for connection to intra-building or unexposed wiring or
cabling only. The intra-building port(s) of the equipment or subassembly MUST
NOT be metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its
wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only
(Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR- 1089) and require isolation from
the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient
protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.
● The intra-building port(s) (list the port or ports) of the equipment or
subassembly must use shielded intra-building cabling/wiring that is grounded
at both ends.
● The preceding requirements only apply to North America.

4.1.3.2 Assembling Power Cables

This section describes how to assemble power cables with an OT terminal, JG
terminal, and cord end terminal.

4.1.3.2.1 Assembling a Power Cable with an OT Terminal

This section describes how to assemble a power cable with an OT terminal.

Context
Figure 4-11shows the components of an OT terminal and a power cable.

Figure 4-11 Components of an OT terminal and a power cable

A Heat shrink tubing B. Bare crimp terminal C. Insulation layer of D. Conductor of the
the power cable power cable

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 206

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Procedure
Step 1 Based on the cross-sectional area of the cable conductor, strip a part of the
insulation layer. The L1-long conductor is exposed, as shown in Figure 4-12. Table
4-8 lists the recommended values for L1.

Figure 4-12 Stripping a power cable (OT terminal)

NOTICE

● When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable.
● If the bare crimp terminal is not provided by Huawei, ensure that the value of
L1 is 1 mm (0.04 in.) to 2 mm (0.08 in.) greater than the value of L.

Table 4-8 Mapping between the cross-sectional area of the conductor and the
value of L1
Cross- Value of L1 (mm) Cross-Sectional Value of L1 (mm)
Sectional (in.) Area of Conductor (in.)
Area of (mm2) (in.2)
Conductor
(mm2) (in.2)

1 (0.002 in.2) 7 (0.28 in.) 10 (0.02 in.2) 11 (0.43 in.)

1.5 (0.002 7 (0.28 in.) 16 (0.02 in.2) 13 (0.51 in.)

in.2)

2.5 (0.004 7 (0.28 in.) 25 (0.04 in.2) 14 (0.55 in.)

in.2)

4 (0.006 in.2) 8 (0.31 in.) 35 (0.05 in.2) 16 (0.63 in.)

6 (0.009 in.2) 9 (0.35 in.) 50 (0.08 in.2) 16 (0.63 in.)

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 207

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NOTE

If you are proficient in assembling a power cable with an OT terminal, you can determine
the value of L1 by comparing the part to be crimped with the power cable.

Step 2 Put the heat shrink tubing (A) onto the bare crimp terminal, as shown in Figure
4-13.

Figure 4-13 Putting the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimp terminal

Step 3 Put the OT terminal onto the exposed conductor and ensure that the OT terminal
is in good contact with the insulation layer of the power cable, as shown in Figure
4-13.

NOTICE

After the conductor is fed into the OT terminal, the protruding part of the
conductor (L2 in Figure 4-13) must not be longer than 2 mm (0.08 in.).

Step 4 Crimp the joint parts of the bare crimp terminal and the conductor, as shown in
Figure 4-14.
NOTE

The shapes of the crimped parts may vary with the crimping dies.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 208

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-14 Crimping the joint parts of the bare crimp terminal and the conductor

Step 5 Push the heat shrink tubing (A) towards the connector until the tube covers the
crimped part, and then heat the tube using a heat gun, as shown in Figure 4-15.

Figure 4-15 Heating the heat shrink tubing

NOTICE

Stop heating the heat shrink tubing when it has shrunk firmly around the
connector.

----End

4.1.3.2.2 Assembling a Power Cable with a JG Terminal

This section describes how to assemble a power cable with a JG terminal.

Context
Figure 4-16 shows the components of a JG terminal and a power cable.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 209

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-16 Components of a JG terminal and a power cable

A. JG terminal B. Heat shrink tubing C. Insulation layer of D. Conductor of the

the power cable power cable

Procedure
Step 1 Based on the cross-sectional area of the cable conductor, strip a part of the cable.
The L-long conductor is exposed, as shown in Figure 4-17. Table 4-9 lists the
recommended values for L.

NOTICE

● When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable.
● If the bare crimp terminal is not provided by Huawei, determine the value of L
according to the L value of the JG terminal.

Figure 4-17 Stripping a power cable (JG terminal)

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 210

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-9 Mapping between the cross-sectional area of the conductor and the
value of L

Cross-Sectional Area of Conductor Value of L (mm) (in.)

(mm2) (in.2)

16 (0.02 in.2) 13 (0.51 in.)

25 (0.04 in.2) 14 (0.55 in.)

35 (0.05 in.2) 16 (0.63 in.)

50 (0.08 in.2) 16 (0.63 in.)

Step 2 Put the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimp terminal, as shown in Figure 4-18.

Figure 4-18 Putting the heat shrink tubing onto the bare crimp terminal

Step 3 Put the bare crimp terminal onto the exposed conductor, and ensure that the bare
crimp terminal is in good contact with the insulation layer of the power cable, as
shown in Figure 4-18.

Step 4 Crimp the joint parts of the bare crimp terminal and the conductor, as shown in
Figure 4-19.

Figure 4-19 Crimping the joint parts of the bare crimp terminal and the conductor
(JG terminal)

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 211

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Step 5 Push the heat shrink tubing towards the connector until the tube covers the
crimped part, and then heat the tube using a heat gun, as shown in Figure 4-20.

Figure 4-20 Heating the heat shrink tubing (JG terminal)

----End

4.1.3.2.3 Assembling a Power Cable to a Cord End Terminal

This section describes how to assemble a power cable with a cord end terminal.

Context
Figure 4-21 shows the components of a cord end terminal and a power cable.

Figure 4-21 Components of a cord end terminal and a power cable

A. Cord end terminal B. Insulation layer of a power C. Conductor of a power cable

cable

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 212

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Procedure
Step 1 Based on the cross-sectional area of the cable conductor, strip a part of the
insulation layer. The L1-long conductor is exposed, as shown in Figure 4-22. Table
4-10 lists the recommended values for L1.

NOTICE

When you strip a power cable, do not damage the conductor of the cable.

Figure 4-22 Stripping a power cable (cord end terminal)

Table 4-10 Mapping between the cross-sectional area of the conductor and the
value of L1

Cross- Value of L1 (mm) Cross-Sectional Value of L1 (mm)

Sectional (in.) Area of Conductor (in.)
Area of (mm2) (in.2)
Conductor
(mm2) (in.2)

1 (0.002 in.2) 8 (0.31 in.) 10 (0.02 in.2) 15 (0.59 in.)

1.5 (0.002 10 (0.39 in.) 16 (0.02 in.2) 15 (0.59 in.)

in.2)

2.5 (0.004 10 (0.39 in.) 25 (0.04 in.2) 18 (0.71 in.)

in.2)

4 (0.006 in.2) 12 (0.47 in.) 35 (0.05 in.2) 19 (0.75 in.)

6 (0.009 in.2) 14 (0.55 in.) 50 (0.08 in.2) 26 (1.02 in.)

Step 2 Put the cord end terminal onto the conductor and ensure that the conductor is
aligned with the edge of the cord end terminal, as shown in Figure 4-23.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 213

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NOTICE

After the conductor is fed into the cord end terminal, the protruding part of the
conductor must not be longer than 1 mm (0.04 in.).

Figure 4-23 Putting the cord end terminal onto the conductor

Step 3 Crimp the joint parts of the cord end terminal and the conductor, as shown in
Figure 4-24.

Figure 4-24 Crimping the cord end terminal and the conductor

Step 4 Check the maximum width of the cord end terminal. Table 4-11 lists the
maximum width of a cord end terminal.

Table 4-11 Maximum width of a cord end terminal

Cross-Sectional Area of the Terminal Maximum Width of the Terminal W1

(mm2) (in.2) (mm) (in.)

0.25 (0.0004 in.2) 1 (0.04 in.)

0.5 (0.0008 in.2) 1 (0.04 in.)

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 214

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Cross-Sectional Area of the Terminal Maximum Width of the Terminal W1

(mm2) (in.2) (mm) (in.)

1.0 (0.002 in.2) 1.5 (0.06 in.)

1.5 (0.002 in.2) 1.5 (0.06 in.)

2.5 (0.004 in.2) 2.4 (0.09 in.)

4 (0.006 in.2) 3.1 (0.12 in.)

6 (0.009 in.2) 4 (0.16 in.)

10 (0.02 in.2) 5.3 (0.21 in.)

16 (0.02 in.2) 6 (0.24 in.)

25 (0.04 in.2) 8.7 (0.34 in.)

35 (0.05 in.2) 10 (0.39 in.)

----End

4.1.3.3 Assembling Ethernet Cables

This section describes how to assemble an Ethernet cable with an RJ45 connector.

4.1.3.3.1 Assembling an Ethernet Cable with a Shielded RJ45 Connector

This section describes how to assemble a straight-through cable with a shielded
RJ45 connector.

Context
Figure 4-25 shows the components of a shielded RJ45 connector and a straight-
through cable.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 215

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-25 Components of a shielded RJ45 connector and a straight-through

cable

A. Connector jacket B. Metal shell of the C. Wire holder of the D. Connector plug
connector connector

E. Ethernet cable jacket F. Shield layer of the G. Twisted pairs -

Ethernet cable

Procedure
Step 1 Thread the Ethernet cable through the connector jacket (A), as shown in Figure
4-26.

Figure 4-26 Threading the Ethernet cable through the connector jacket

Step 2 Remove a 30-mm (1.18 in.) long section of the cable jacket (E), cut off the nylon
ripcord inside the jacket, and cut a 5-mm (0.20 in.) cleft in the cable jacket (E), as
shown Figure 4-27.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 216

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NOTICE

● When you remove a section of the jacket, do not damage the shield layer of
the twisted-pair cable.
● When you remove the shield layer, do not damage the insulation layer of the
twisted-pair cable.

Figure 4-27 Removing the jacket of a twisted pair cable (unit: mm (in.))

Step 3 Thread the twisted pair cable through the metal shell (B) and make sure that the
shield layer (F) is completely covered by the metal shell, as shown in Figure 4-28.

Figure 4-28 Threading the twisted pair cable through the metal shell

Step 4 Along the edge of the metal shell, cut off the shield layer with aluminum foil and
ensure that there is no surplus copper wire. The exposed twisted pairs (G) are
about 20 mm (0.79 in.) long, as shown in Figure 4-29.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 217

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-29 Removing the shield layer of a twisted pair cable (unit: mm (in.))

Step 5 Based on the colors, lead the four twisted pairs through the wire holder (C), as
shown in Figure 4-30 and Figure 4-31.

Figure 4-30 Leading twisted pairs through the wire holder

Figure 4-31 Twisted pair positions in a wire holder

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 218

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Step 6 Route the four twisted pairs (G) in the wire holder (C) based on their colors, as
shown in Figure 4-32. Figure 4-33 shows and Table 4-12 lists the mapping
between core wire colors and pins.

Figure 4-32 Routing the four twisted pairs in the wire holder

Figure 4-33 Mapping between core wire colors and pins

Table 4-12 Mapping between core wire colors and pins

Pin Number Core Wire Color

1 Brown

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 219

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Pin Number Core Wire Color

2 White-Brown

3 Green

4 White-Blue

5 Blue

6 White-Green

7 Orange

8 White-Orange

Step 7 Cut off any surplus cable along the lower edge of the wire holder (C), as shown in
Figure 4-34.

Figure 4-34 Cutting off surplus cable

Step 8 Put the connector body (D) onto the wire holder and turn the metal shell by 90°,
as shown in Figure 4-35.
NOTE

Ensure that the wire holder is in good contact with the connector body.

Figure 4-35 Putting the connector body onto the wire holder

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 220

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Step 9 Push the metal shell (B) towards the connector body until the wire holder and
connector body are completely covered. Crimp the connector, as shown in Figure
4-36.

Figure 4-36 Crimping the connector

Step 10 Push the connector jacket towards the metal shell until the metal shell is covered,
as shown in Figure 4-37.

Figure 4-37 Covering the metal shell

Step 11 Repeat Step 1 through Step 10 for the other end of the Ethernet cable.

----End

4.1.3.3.2 Checking the Metal Contacts

This section describes how to check the metal contacts to preliminarily determine
if an assembled RJ45 connector meets the necessary standards.

Context
● To ensure proper contact between the crimped parts and core wires, the
heights and sizes of the metal contacts must be uniform and standard.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 221

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● The metal contacts must be parallel to each other, with an offset less than 5°.
The top margin of a metal contact must be parallel to the axis of the
connector, with an offset less than 10°.
● To ensure proper conduction, the surface of the metal contacts must be clean.
● The metal contacts must be in good contact with the RJ45 socket. The plastic
spacings must remain intact and must be aligned properly.
● The soldering edge of a metal contact must surpass the ends of the core
wires. The ends of the core wires must be in contact with the edge of the RJ45
trough. The distance between them must be less than 0.5 mm (0.02 in.).

Procedure
Step 1 Hold the crimped connector, with the front side facing you, and check whether the
metal contacts are the same height. The height must be 6.02 ± 0.13 mm (0.24 ±
0.005 in.). If a measuring tool is not available, you can visually compare the
connector with a standard connector. Figure 4-38 shows a defective connector
and Figure 4-39 shows a well-made connector.
NOTE

All defective connectors must be crimped again.

Figure 4-38 Metal contacts of different heights

Figure 4-39 Metal contacts of the same height

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 222

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Step 2 Hold the RJ45 connector and turn it by 45°. Observe the top edges of the metal
contacts. Figure 4-40 shows a defective connector.

Figure 4-40 Unparallel metal contacts of different heights

Step 3 Check whether the metal contacts are clean. If they are not clean and the dirt
cannot be removed, replace the RJ45 connector. Figure 4-41 shows a defective
connector.

Figure 4-41 Dirt on a metal contact

Step 4 Check whether the metal contacts and the plastic spacings are intact and stand
straight. If a part is skewed and it cannot be fixed, replace the RJ45 connector.
Figure 4-42 shows a defective connector.

Figure 4-42 RJ45 connector with oblique plastic spacings

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 223

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Step 5 Hold the connector, with the side facing towards you, and check whether you can
see the cross-sections of the core wires. Ensure that the ends of the core wires are
in good contact with the edge of the RJ45 trough, and that the soldering edge of
the metal contact surpasses the ends of the core wires and is reliably crimped with
the core wires. If not, replace the RJ45 connector. Figure 4-43 shows a defective
connector.

Figure 4-43 Core wires not in good contact with the edge of the RJ45 trough

----End

4.1.3.3.3 Testing the Connectivity of Assembled Ethernet Cables

This section describes how to test an assembled Ethernet cable to check whether
the connectors and wires at both ends are correctly connected. A straight-through
cable is used as an example.

Context
Straight-through cables and crossover cables are both commonly used in Huawei
products.

● Straight-through cables are connected in a one-to-one manner. They are used

to connect network adapters to equipment such as switches and hubs. Table
4-13 lists the connections of core wires in a straight-through cable.

Table 4-13 Connections of core wires in a straight-through cable

RJ45 Connector RJ45 Connector Core Wire Color Twisted

1 2

2 2 Orange Yes

1 1 Orange-White

6 6 Green Yes

3 3 Green-White

4 4 Blue Yes

5 5 Blue-White

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 224

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

RJ45 Connector RJ45 Connector Core Wire Color Twisted

1 2

8 8 Brown Yes

7 7 Brown-White

● Crossover cables are connected in a crossover manner. They are used to

connect network adapters to equipment such as switches and hubs. Table
4-14 lists the connections of core wires in a crossover cable.

Table 4-14 Connections of core wires in a crossover cable

RJ45 Connector RJ45 Connector Core Wire Color Twisted

1 2

6 2 Orange Yes

3 1 Orange-White

2 6 Green Yes

1 3 Green-White

4 4 Blue Yes

5 5 Blue-White

8 8 Brown Yes

7 7 Brown-White

Figure 4-44 shows the pins of an RJ45 connector.

Figure 4-44 Pins of an RJ45 connector

Procedure
Step 1 Feed both cable connectors into the ports on a cable tester.

Step 2 Turn on the tester. If the indicators 1 to G light simultaneously, pins are working
normally and the wires are connected correctly.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 225

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NOTE

Turn the switch to the S position and check whether indicators on the left and right sections
of the tester light simultaneously, as shown in Figure 4-45.

Figure 4-45 Testing the connectivity of an assembled Ethernet cable

Step 3 Gently shake the connectors and check whether indicators on the left and right
sections of the tester light simultaneously. If yes, the metal contact strips are in
good contact with the core wires and the ports on the cable tester, as shown in
Figure 4-46.

Figure 4-46 Checking the reliability of metal contacts

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 226

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

The procedure for testing a crossover cable is similar to that for testing a straight-
through cable except for the sequence in which the indicators light. You need to
refer to the core wire connections of a crossover cable provided in Table 4-14.

A crossover cable is well-made only if the indicators light in the following

sequence:

In the master (left) section of the tester, the indicators turn on in the sequence of
1-8-G. In the slave (right) section of the tester, the indicators turn on in the
sequence of 3-6-1-4-5-2-7-8-G.

NOTE

If a cable tester is unavailable, you can use a multimeter to perform a simple test, as shown
in Figure 4-47.

Figure 4-47 Testing the connectivity of an Ethernet cable using a multimeter

----End

4.1.3.4 Installing Cable Accessories

This section describes how to install the cable accessories, including power
adapters, network adapters, and fiber connectors.

4.1.3.4.1 Precautions for Installing Cable Accessories

You must take precautions when installing cable accessories and follow the correct
installation procedure.

NOTE

Illustrations of components in this document may differ from actual components. For
example, in this document the adapters of cable connectors have independent interfaces,
whereas adapters may actually have interfaces fixed on equipment. However, the
installation procedures are similar.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 227

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Tools
Use dedicated tools provided or specified by Huawei and use them in accordance
with their specifications and instructions.

Bending Radius
Unless otherwise specified, the bending radius (R) of cables or fibers must meet
the requirements listed in Table 4-15.

Table 4-15 Bending radius of cables or fibers

Cable or Fiber Bending Radius (R)

Ordinary cable R ≥ 5d, for the part near the cable

connector R ≥ 2d, for the rest of the
cable

Fiber For a single-mode G.657A2 optical

fiber, R≥10 mm; for a multi-mode A1b
optical fiber,R≥30 mm.
Bending angle > 90°

NOTE

The letter d indicates the diameter of the cable or fiber.

Precautions for Installation

● Hold the terminals of cables instead of pulling the cables when installing or
removing the cable components.
● Do not use excessive force when inserting a connector into an adapter. If a
connector cannot be fully inserted, pull it out using a dedicated tool and
ensure that you are trying to insert the connector into the correct position.
● Before tightening screws on cable connectors, make sure that the connectors
are in good contact with their adapters. Use a flat-head or Phillips screwdriver
rather than hands or an electric screwdriver to tighten the screws. Stop
immediately if the screws cannot be tightened. Identify the cause and rectify
the fault before attempting to tighten the screws again so as to prevent
damage to the connector and adapter.
● When removing densely distributed cables or fiber connectors, use dedicated
pliers such as cable-pulling pliers and fiber-pulling pliers.
● Do not twist, bend, stretch, or squeeze fibers during installation.
● Cover the fiber connectors that are not being used with dust-proof caps.
Remove the dust-proof caps only when you are about to use the fiber
connectors.

Requirements for Cable Routing

● To protect cables, remove the burrs in the cable-through holes or install
protective rings in the holes.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 228

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● To ease the connection and to avoid stress, do not make cables too tight at
cable joints. After connecting multiple cables to a connector that has multiple
interfaces, keep the cables slack to avoid generating stress.
● Bind and clean cables gently to avoid cable distortion, which affects signal
quality.
● Keep cables away from moveable objects, such as doors.
● Sharp objects must not touch cable wiring to prevent damage to cables.
● To protect power cables, route power cables of the active and standby power
modules separately.

4.1.3.4.2 Installing Power Adapters

This section describes how to install OT terminals and cord end terminals.

Installing OT Terminals
This section describes how to install one or two OT terminals onto a wiring post.

Procedure
● Installing one OT terminal onto a wiring post
a. Turn the OT terminal so that the conductor is facing upward and align
the hole of the OT terminal with a connecting hole, as shown in Figure
4-48.

Figure 4-48 Aligning the OT terminal with a connecting hole

NOTE

When you install an OT terminal, make sure that you orient the crimp sleeve
correctly. See Figure 4-49, in which A shows the correct orientation while B
shows the wrong orientation.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 229

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-49 Orientation of the crimp sleeve

b. Put a spring washer and a flat washer. Then insert an appropriate screw
and tighten it, as shown in Figure 4-50.

Figure 4-50 Installing a screw to secure one terminal

NOTICE

The OT terminal may slip round on the pivot. Make sure that it is never in
contact with other terminals or metal components.

c. Pull the cable gently to check that it is securely installed. Figure 4-51
shows a securely installed OT terminal.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 230

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-51 Installed OT terminal

● Installing two OT terminals onto a wiring post

Ensure that the wiring post can support two OT terminals before starting the
installation. Also ensure that the electrical connecting pieces have the largest
possible area of contact. Two OT terminals can be installed in one of the
following ways:
– Bend the upper OT terminal at a 45- or 90-degree angle, as shown in
Figure 4-52.
– Lay the two terminals across each other, as shown in Figure 4-53.
– Install the two terminals back-to-back, as shown in Figure 4-54.

Figure 4-52 Bending the upper OT terminal at a 45- or 90-degree angle

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 231

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-53 Laying the two terminals across each other

Figure 4-54 Installing the two terminals back-to-back

NOTICE

If the two terminals are different sizes, place the smaller one above the bigger
one. A maximum of two terminals can be installed onto a wiring post.

● To remove an OT terminal, loosen the screw counterclockwise.

----End

Installing Cord End Terminals

This section describes how to install a cord end terminal.

Procedure
Step 1 Hold a cord end terminal upright and place it over a terminal jack, as shown in
Figure 4-55. To ensure the largest area of contact, place the plain side of the
terminal so that it is facing outwards.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 232

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-55 Placing a terminal on a terminal jack vertically

Step 2 Feed the terminal into the jack, and tighten the screw, as shown in Figure 4-56.

Figure 4-56 Feeding the terminal into the jack

NOTICE

● Ensure that the exposed section of the terminal is less than 2 mm (0.08 in.) in
length, as shown in Figure 4-57.
● Do not press the insulation layer of the terminal.
● Feed only one terminal into one jack.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 233

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-57 Exposed section of the terminal

Step 3 Pull the cable gently to check that it is securely installed.

----End

4.1.3.4.3 Installing Network Port Connectors

This section describes how to install network port connectors.

Installing Shielded Network Port Connectors

This section describes how to install a shielded network port connector.

Procedure
Step 1 Hold the male and female connectors, with the male connector facing the female
connector, as shown in Figure 4-58.

Figure 4-58 Holding the male and female connectors

Step 2 Feed the male connector into the female connector until you hear a click, as
shown in Figure 4-59.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 234

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-59 Feeding the male connector into the female connector

Step 3 Pull the connector gently to check that it is securely installed. Figure 4-60 shows a
securely installed shielded network port connector.

Figure 4-60 Installed shielded network port connector

NOTE

To remove a shielded network port connector, press the locking key and pull out the
connector, as shown in Figure 4-61.

Figure 4-61 Removing a shielded network port connector

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 235

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

----End

4.1.3.4.4 Installing Fiber Connectors

This section describes how to clean fiber connectors and MT connectors with
guide pins, and how to install fiber connectors.

Context

NOTICE

● Leave the dust-proof caps in place until you are about to install the fiber
connectors.
● For an area where fiber connectors are densely distributed, use a dedicated tool
to remove them.

Cleaning Fiber Connectors

This section describes how to clean fiber connectors.

Procedure
Step 1 Dip lint-free cotton in alcohol and let it dry for a moment.

Step 2 Use the cotton to clean the end face of a fiber connector.

Step 3 Clean the end face again using new dust-free cotton without alcohol. Ensure that
the pins are clean. If necessary, use an air gun to remove the residual objects on
the pins.

----End

Cleaning MT Connectors (MTP/MTRJ) That Have Guide Pins

This section describes how to clean the guide pins of MT connectors.

Procedure
Step 1 Fold a piece of lint-free cotton and dip it in alcohol. Then use the cotton to clean
the pins.

Step 2 Clean the pins again using new piece of lint-free cotton without alcohol.

Step 3 Use an air gun to remove any residual objects on the pins.

----End

Installing FC Connectors
This section describes how to install an FC connector.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 236

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dust-proof cap on the FC connector and store it properly for future
use.
Step 2 Align the core pin of the FC (male) connector with that of the female connector,
as shown in Figure 4-62.

Figure 4-62 Aligning the male connector with the female connector

Step 3 Feed the male connector into the female connector, as shown in Figure 4-63.

Figure 4-63 Feeding the male connector into the female connector

Step 4 Fasten the swivel nut and ensure that the connector is securely installed, as shown
in Figure 4-64.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 237

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-64 Fastening the swivel nut

Step 5 To remove an FC connector, loosen the swivel nut, as shown in Figure 4-65.

Figure 4-65 Removing an FC connector

----End

Installing LC Connectors
This section describes how to install an LC connector.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dust-proof cap on the LC connector and store it properly for future
use.

Step 2 Align the core pin of the LC (male) connector with that of the female connector,
as shown in Figure 4-66.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 238

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-66 Aligning the male connector with the female connector

Step 3 Feed the male connector into the female connector, as shown in Figure 4-67.

Figure 4-67 Feeding the male connector into the female connector

Step 4 Stop inserting the connector when it clicks into place, as shown in Figure 4-68.

Figure 4-68 Installed LC connector

Step 5 To remove an LC connector, depress the latch to release it, as shown in Figure
4-69.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 239

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-69 Removing an LC connector

----End

Installing SC Connectors
This section describes how to install an SC connector.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dust-proof cap on the SC connector and store it properly for future
use.

Step 2 Align the core pin of the SC (male) connector with that of the female connector,
as shown in Figure 4-70.

Figure 4-70 Aligning the male connector with the female connector

Step 3 Feed the male connector into the female connector until it clicks into place, as
shown in Figure 4-71.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 240

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-71 Installed SC connector

Step 4 To remove an SC connector, pull it slightly to unlock it and then remove it, as
shown in Figure 4-72.

Figure 4-72 Removing an SC connector

----End

Installing MTRJ Connectors

This section describes how to install an MTRJ connector.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dust-proof cap on the MTRJ connector and store it properly for future
use.

Step 2 Align the core pin of the MTRJ (male) connector with that of the female
connector, as shown in Figure 4-73.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 241

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-73 Aligning the male connector with the female connector

Step 3 Feed the male connector into the female connector, as shown in Figure 4-74.

Figure 4-74 Feeding the male connector into the female connector

Step 4 Stop inserting the connector when it clicks into place, as shown in Figure 4-75.

Figure 4-75 Installed MTRJ connector

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 242

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Step 5 To remove an MTRJ connector, depress the latch to release it, as shown in Figure
4-76.

Figure 4-76 Removing an MTRJ connector

----End

Installing MPO Connectors

This section describes how to install an MPO connector.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dust-proof cap on the MPO connector and store it properly for future
use.
Step 2 Align the core pin of the MPO (male) connector with that of the female
connector, as shown in Figure 4-77.

Figure 4-77 Aligning the male connector with the female connector

Step 3 Hold the shell part labeled "PUSH" and feed the male connector into the female
connector until it clicks into place, as shown in Figure 4-78.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 243

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-78 Installed MPO connector

Step 4 To remove an MPO connector, hold the shell part labeled "PULL" and pull the
connector gently, as shown in Figure 4-79.

Figure 4-79 Removing an MPO connector

----End

4.1.3.5 Replacing the Mould of a Crimping Tool

This section describes how to replace the mould of a crimping tool.

Procedure
Step 1 Hold the handles of the crimping tool. Loosen the two fastening screws, as shown
in Figure 4-80.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 244

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-80 Loosening two fastening screws

Step 2 Hold the handles of the crimping tool to open the self-locking lock. At this time,
the jaw of the crimping tool opens automatically, as shown in Figure 4-81.

Figure 4-81 Pliers jaw opening automatically

Step 3 Remove the mould from the crimping tool, as shown in Figure 4-82.

Figure 4-82 Removing the mould from the crimping tool

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 245

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Step 4 Place the new mould into the jaw of the crimping tool and align the screw holes,
as shown in Figure 4-83.

Figure 4-83 Installing a new mould in the crimping tool

NOTICE

Keep the short side of the mould inwards and the long side outwards. The teeth of
the mould should go from largest toward the inside to smallest toward the
outside.

Step 5 Hold the handles of the crimping tool tightly to match the mould and the jaw
completely. Align the screw holes, as shown in Figure 4-84.

Figure 4-84 Aligning the screw holes

Step 6 Hold the handles of the crimping tool with one hand. Tighten the two fastening
screws. Figure 4-85 shows the mould installed in the crimping tool.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 246

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-85 Mould installed in the crimping tool

Figure 4-86 shows the finished crimping tool.

Figure 4-86 Finished crimping tool

----End

4.1.4 Equipment Grounding Specifications

This chapter describes grounding specifications, including general grounding
specifications, the grounding specifications for equipment rooms, devices, power
supply systems, signal cables, and the specifications for laying out ground cables.

4.1.4.1 General Grounding Specifications

This section describes the general grounding specifications.
Table 4-16 lists the general grounding specifications.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 247

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-16 General grounding specifications

No. Description

1 The grounding design must follow the principles of equal voltage and
equipotential connection. Specifically, the working ground and protection
ground, including the shielded grounding and surge protection
grounding of a distribution frame, are connected to the same ground
busbar.

2 The cabling trays, racks or shells, metal ventilation pipes, metal doors
and windows in the equipment room must be grounded for protection.

3 The metal parts of a device that are neutral in normal conditions must
be grounded for protection.

4 The ground cable must be connected properly to the protection ground

bar in the equipment room.

5 Do not take other devices as the component part of the ground cable or
electrical connection.

4.1.4.2 Grounding Specifications for Equipment Room

This section describes the grounding specifications for equipment room.
It is recommended that the grounding resistance be less than or equal to ten ohm.

4.1.4.3 Grounding Specifications for Devices

This section describes the specifications for devices.
Table 4-17 lists the grounding specifications for devices.

Table 4-17 Equipment grounding specifications

No. Description

1 All communication devices and auxiliary devices (such as mobile base

stations, transmission and switching devices, and power supply devices)
in equipment room should be grounded for protection. Connect the
protection ground for various devices to the same ground busbar, and
then to the same protection ground bar in the room together with the
PGND of the devices.

2 The PGND of a device is shorted to the copper protection ground bar

provided by the user. The short-circuiting cable used should have
alternating yellow and green plastic insulating and a copper core, with
cross-sectional area greater than 35 mm2 (0.05 in.2).

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 248

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

No. Description

3 There are ground terminals and ground flags at the lower part of the
front door, rear door, and side panel of a cabinet. The ground terminals
must be connected to the ground terminals of the cabinet framework
through connection cables with a cross-sectional area no less than 1.6
mm2 (0.002 in.2).

4 Ensure that all metal components of a cabinet have good conductibility.

No insulating coating should be sprayed on the connections of metal
components.

5 Connect cabinets in the same row closely by fastening captive screws

and washers on the top of the cabinets. Do not spray coating into a
rectangle area of 30 mm (1.18 in.) x 50 mm (1.97 in.) around the
connection hole for a captive screw. Measures to prevent rust and
corrosion must be taken for this area. Zinc electroplating with iridescent
yellow chromate conversion coating should be applied to the washer
and nut to ensure sufficient electric contact.

6 When combining cabinets of the same type, short-circuiting cables are

required to connect the ground busbars (if any) for the cabinets. The
cross-sectional area of the short-circuiting cable is 6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)
and is less than 300 mm (11.81 in.) long. Connect the two ends of a
short-circuiting cable to the ground busbar terminals of the neighboring
cabinets and fix them firmly.

4.1.4.4 Grounding Specifications for Power Supply Systems

This section describes the grounding specifications for power supply systems.
Table 4-18 lists the grounding specifications for power supply systems.

Table 4-18 Grounding specifications for power supply systems

No. Description

1 The AC power supply system for equipment room should use a TN-S
power supply.

2 The inlet for an AC power cable to enter the equipment room should be
equipped with a surge protection device (C-level) with a nominal
discharging current no less than 20 kA.

3 The protection ground for the power supply and that for devices are
connected to the same ground busbar. If the power supply and devices
are located in the same equipment room, try to use the same protection
ground bar for them.

4 A surge protection circuit should be added for an AC power interface.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 249

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

No. Description

5 The anode of the -48 V DC power supply or negative pole of the 24 V

DC power supply should be grounded at the output point of the DC
power supply.

6 The working ground and protection ground of the DC power supply

must be connected to the same ground busbar as the protection ground
of the devices. If the power supply and devices are located in the same
equipment room, try to use the same protection ground bar for them.

7 A surge protection circuit should be added for a DC power interface.

4.1.4.5 Grounding Specifications for Signal Cables

This section describes the grounding specifications for signal cables.
Table 4-19 lists the grounding specifications for signal cables.

Table 4-19 Grounding specifications for signal cables

No. Description

1 If there are digital trunk lines that connect a transmission device directly
or indirectly to the base station of a wireless communication device,
install an E1 surge protector for the corresponding interfaces of the
transmission device.

2 Equip cables laid outdoors with metal jackets, and ground both ends, or
connect them to the protection ground bar in the equipment room. For
cables inside the equipment room, install surge protection devices at the
corresponding interfaces of the device. The PGND cable for the surge
protection devices should be as short as possible.

3 Both ends of the external conductor of a coaxial cable and those of the
shield layer of the shielded cable should have good electric contact with
the metal shell of the device that they connect to.

4 The incoming and outgoing signal cables at a site and the idle wire pair
inside the cables should be grounded for protection.

5 Tone & Data Access (TDA) cables must pass the main distribution frame
(MDF) with a security unit when going out of an office or site. Its shield
layer should be connected to the protection ground of the MDF. The
MDF and cabinet must be connected to the same ground busbar.

6 Signal cables in a communication office or mobile station should not be

routed overhead.

4.1.4.6 Specifications for Laying Ground Cables

This section describes the specifications for laying ground cables.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 250

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-20 lists the specifications for laying ground cables.

Table 4-20 Specifications for laying ground cables

No. Description

1 The ground lead should not be parallel with or twist around the signal
cable.

2 The ground cable cannot be led in aerially, but should be buried in the
earth or laid indoors.

3 Do not connect two protection ground cables to extend the cable length.
Do not add any switches or fuses.

4 The protection ground cable should have alternating yellow and green
plastic insulating and a copper core.

5 The neutral line of an AC power cable cannot be connected to the

protection ground of any transmission or communication devices in the
equipment room.

6 The length of a protection ground cable should not exceed 45 m (177

in.). The protection ground cable should be as short as possible. When it
is longer than 45 m (177 in.), you can advise the user to move the
ground bar to a closer position.

4.1.5 Labels for Cables

This chapter gives you an overview of labels and describes the labels for optical
fibers, Ethernet cables, and power cables.

A label serves as an identifier for on-site installation and maintenance. Labels on

the cables facilitate correct and neat cable connections, and easy maintenance.

Two types of labels are defined: one for power cables and the other for signal
cables.
● Signal cables include network cables, fibers, trunk cables, and user cables
(excluding antenna feeders).
● Power cables include AC power cables and DC power cables (excluding power
bus cables).

NOTE

Labels can be filled in based on user's requirements. In this case, make a relevant statement
in the self-check report.

4.1.5.1 Introduction to Labels

This section describes the material, types, structure, and contents of labels, the
way to print, fill in, and attach labels, and the precautions for using labels.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 251

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.1.5.1.1 Label Materials

Label materials must meet the following requirements:
● Thickness: 0.09 mm (0.004 in.)
● Color: chalk white
● Material: polyester (PET)
● Allowable temperature range: -29 °C to +149 °C (-20.2 °F to 300.2 °F)
● Supports laser printing and can be written on with oil-based markers
● Passed UL and CSA authentication

4.1.5.1.2 Type and Structure

Signal Cable Label

A signal cable label is L-shaped with fixed dimensions, as shown in Figure 4-87.

Figure 4-87 Signal cable label

To clearly specify the position of a cable, dividing lines are used on the label. For
example, there is a dividing line between the cabinet number and chassis number,
and another one between the chassis number and slot number. A dividing line is
1.5 mm (0.06 in.) x 0.6 mm (0.02 in.) in size with the color of PONTONE 656c
(light blue).

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 252

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

The label can be folded along the perforated line and its size is 1 mm (0.04 in.) x 2
mm (0.08 in.).

Write information about the other end of the cable after "TO:" (which is upside
down in Figure 4-87) in the lower right corner of the label.

Power Cable Label

A power cable label must be attached to an identification plate with a cable tie.
Attach a label to the recess area in the middle of the identification plate, as shown
in Figure 4-88.

Figure 4-88 Power cable label

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 253

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.1.5.1.3 Label Printing

The contents can be printed or written on labels. Printing is recommended as it is
usually more efficient and maintains consistency.

Template for Printing

You must use a template to print a label. You can obtain the template in the
following ways:
● Log in to the technical support website at https://support.huawei.com to
download the template. Here is the path:Cable Engineering Label Printing
Template.
● Obtain the template from the Huawei local office.

The template is made in Microsoft Word. Adhere to the following requirements

when using the template:
● You can modify the contents of the template if required. However, do not
change the centered setting, direction, and fonts of the characters.
● You can use a smaller text size if there is too much information to fill in, but
ensure that the text can still be read clearly after it has been printed out.

Merging Cells in the Template

To merge two or more cells, do as follows:
1. Choose Edit > Select All.
2. Choose Format > Borders and Shading > Borders. Click the Box tab and click
OK.
3. Drag the mouse to select cells to be merged and choose Table > Merge Cells.

Requirements for the Printer

A laser jet printer is required for printing labels. Before printing a label, adjust the
page setup and print some test labels.
1. Cover a piece of label paper with an ordinary piece of blank paper, and check
whether the page setup conforms to the requirements.
2. Make sure the printer properties such as "paper size" and "direction" have
been set correctly.
3. Try printing and check that the printout is clear and correctly laid out:
– If yes, print labels directly.
– If not, adjust the page setup and try printing again. Repeat until the
correct printout is produced.

Do as follows to adjust the page setup:

1. Choose File > Page Setup.
2. Choose Layout and set Header and Footer to 0.
3. Click the Margins tab. Select Left for Gutter Position and set Top, Bottom,
Left, and Right.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 254

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NOTE

If the warning prompt as shown in Figure 4-89 appears before printing, click Ignore
to continue printing.

Figure 4-89 Warning prompt before printing

After the page setup has been made correctly, save it for future use. This page
setup is only necessary for the first time you use the template to print labels.

Requirements for Feeding Paper Into the Printer

Different from ordinary paper, a piece of label paper is composed of two layers.
Feed in label papers one piece at a time manually. Never use auto-feed for label
paper to avoid paper jams.

Different models of printers may have different methods of feeding paper. Make
sure to feed in label papers correctly.

Requirements for Printed Labels

Make sure that the printed labels satisfy the following requirements:
● All the printouts are within the label.
● Contents in cells are aligned in the center. In a single-line printout, the
dividing lines and the "TO:" should not be covered by printed text.
● When the cells are merged and the printouts are made in multiple lines, avoid
covering the "TO:" with printing text. To do so, use space bar to move the
printing contents to the next line.

4.1.5.1.4 Writing Labels

Writing Tools
To make sure that the printouts are clear and legible, use black oil-based markers
instead of ball-point pens to write the labels.

In special cases, black ball-point pens are allowed, although not recommended.
When writing with a ball-point pen, take care not to leave smudged ink on the
label, which may contaminate the label and blur the words.

NOTE

The delivered marker has two nibs. Use the smaller nib to write labels.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 255

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Font
So that handwriting is legible, it should be as similar as possible to the standard
Times New Roman typeface. Table 4-21 shows the standard typeface.

Table 4-21 Standard typeface for handwriting

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 A B C D E F G H

I J K L M N O P Q

R S T U V W X Y Z

Write characters at a size that is easy to read. The characters should be clear,
distinct, and tidy.
Figure 4-90 shows the writing direction.

Figure 4-90 Writing direction for characters on a label

4.1.5.1.5 Attaching Labels

After printing or writing a label, remove the label from the bottom of the page
and attach it to a signal cable, or the identification plate of a power cable. The
following section describes how to attach labels.

Signal Cable Label

● Determine the position for a label.
The label is attached 2 cm (0.08 in.) away from the connector of a signal
cable. A label can also be attached at other positions if required, for example,
to avoid the cable being bent or affecting other cables. The attached label
needs to face to the right or downwards, as shown in Figure 4-91. The details
are as follows:
– If a signal cable is routed vertically, the label needs to face to the right.
– If a signal cable is routed horizontally, the label needs to face
downwards.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 256

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-91 Direction of an attached label

● Procedure for attaching signal labels

Figure 4-92 shows the methods and procedures for attaching a signal label.

Figure 4-92 Attaching a signal cable label

Power Cable Label

Remove a label from the bottom of the page, and then attach it to the
identification plate with a cable tie. The label should be stuck to the rectangular
flute and should be stuck to only one side of the identification plate. The cable tie
is tied 2 cm (0.08 in.) away from the connector of the power cable. A cable tie can
also be tied at other positions if required.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 257

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Both ends of a cable require a label. The attached identification plate should be
on top of the cable or on the right side of the cable, as shown in Figure 4-93. The
details are as follows:
● The identification plate is on the right side of the cable when the cable is
routed vertically.
● The identification plate is on top of the cable when the cable is routed
horizontally.

Figure 4-93 Binding a label for a power cable

4.1.5.1.6 Contents of Labels

Contents of Power Cable Labels

A power cable label is attached only on one side of an identification plate. On the
label, there is information (the contents after the "TO:") about the location of the
device on the other end of the cable, such as the location of the control cabinet,
distribution box, or power socket.

Contents of Signal Cable Labels

The two sides of a signal cable label carry information about the location of the
ports connected to both ends of the cable. Figure 4-94 shows the information on
both sides of a signal cable label.
● Area 1 contains the location information of the local end of the cable.
● Area 2 marked with "TO:" contains the location information of the opposite
end of the cable.
● Area 3 will be folded.

Figure 4-94 Contents of a signal cable label

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 258

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Observed from the cabling end of a device, the text part of a label is on the right
side of the cable. The side marked with "TO:" carries the location information of
the opposite end; and the other side carries the location information of the local
end.
Therefore, the information in Area 1 at one end is the same as the information in
Area 2 at the other end of a cable.

4.1.5.1.7 Precautions for Using Labels

When using labels, note the following:
● When printing, writing, or attaching labels, keep the labels clean.
● Since the label paper is made of moistureproof and waterproof materials, do
not use ink-jet printers and ink pens to print or write labels.
● Labels should be attached neatly. New-type labels are strip-shaped. If they are
attached at incorrect locations or in the wrong direction, the appearance of
the device is affected.
● Power cable ties should be tied at the same position on each power cable,
with identification plates on the same side.
● The positions of "up", "down", "left" or "right" are all based on the viewpoint
of the engineer working on the label.
● Engineering labels are auxiliary materials for engineering installation. The
engineering labels in Huawei auxiliary material packages are simple labels
that are provided free of charge. After-sales and maintenance services are not
provided. Customers who have warranty quality requirements for engineering
labels are recommended to purchase locally.

4.1.5.2 Labels for Fibers

This section describes the labels for fibers, including the labels for fibers between
devices and the labels for fibers between a device and an ODF.
These labels are attached to fibers that connect optical interfaces on the boards in
a chassis or a fixed-configuration device. There are two types of labels for fibers:
● One is for the fiber that connects optical interfaces on two devices.
● The other is for the fiber that connects the device and ODF.

4.1.5.2.1 Labels for Fibers Connecting Devices

Information on the Label

Table 4-22 provides information on both sides of a label for a fiber that connects
two devices.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 259

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-22 Information on a label for a fiber between two devices

Content Meaning Description

MN-B-C-D- MN: cabinet M identifies the row number of a cabinet. Rows

R/T number are numbered from A to Z from front to back.
N identifies the column number of a cabinet.
Columns are numbered from 01 to 99 from left
to right.
For example, A01 indicates row A, column 01.

B: chassis A two-digit number that indicates the position

number of a subrack in a cabinet, for example, 01.
Subracks are numbered from bottom to top.

C: physical A two-digit number starting from 1. For

slot number example, 01 indicates slot 1. Slots are numbered
from top to bottom and from left to right.

D: optical A two-digit number starting from 0. For

interface example, 01 indicates the second optical
number. interface. Optical interfaces are numbered from
top to bottom and from left to right.

R: receive -
optical
interface
T: transmit
optical
interface

MN-B-C-D- MN: cabinet M identifies the row number of a cabinet. Rows

R/T number are numbered from A to Z from front to back.
N identifies the column number of a cabinet.
Columns are numbered from 01 to 99 from left
to right.
For example, A01 indicates row A, column 01.

B: chassis A two-digit number that indicates the position

number of a subrack in a cabinet, for example, 01.
Subracks are numbered from bottom to top.

C: physical A two-digit number starting from 1. For

slot number example, 01 indicates slot 1. Slots are numbered
from top to bottom and from left to right.

D: optical A two-digit number starting from 0. For

interface example, 01 indicates the second optical
number. interface. Optical interfaces are numbered from
top to bottom and from left to right.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 260

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Content Meaning Description

R: receive -
optical
interface
T: transmit
optical
interface

Example Label
Figure 4-95 shows an example label for a fiber connecting two devices.

Figure 4-95 Example label for a fiber connecting two devices

The label shown in Figure 4-95 contains the following information:

● "A01-01-05-01-R" indicates that the local end of the optical fiber is connected
to receive optical interface 02 on slot 05 in chassis 01 in the cabinet in row A,
column 01.
● "G01-01-01-01-T" indicates that the other end of the optical fiber is
connected to transmit optical interface 02 on slot 01 in chassis 01 in the
cabinet in row G, column 01.

4.1.5.2.2 Labels for Fibers Connecting the Device and ODF

Information on the Label

Table 4-23 provides information on both sides of a label for a fiber that connects
the device and ODF.

Table 4-23 Information on a label for a fiber between the device and ODF

Content Meaning Description

MN-B-C-D- MN: cabinet M identifies the row number of a cabinet. Rows

R/T number are numbered from A to Z from front to back.
N identifies the column number of a cabinet.
Columns are numbered from 01 to 99 from left
to right.
For example, A01 indicates row A, column 01.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 261

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Content Meaning Description

B: chassis A two-digit number that indicates the position

number of a subrack in a cabinet, for example, 01.
Subracks are numbered from bottom to top.

C: physical slot A two-digit number starting from 1. For

number example, 01 indicates slot 1. Slots are
numbered from top to bottom and from left to
right.

D: optical A two-digit number starting from 0. For

interface example, 01 indicates the second optical
number. interface. Optical interfaces are numbered from
top to bottom and from left to right.

R: receive -
optical
interface
T: transmit
optical
interface

ODF-MN-B- MN: ODF M identifies the row number of an ODF. Rows

C-R/T number are numbered from A to Z from front to back.
N identifies the column number of an ODF.
Columns are numbered from 01 to 99 from left
to right.
For example, G01 indicates row G, column 01.

B: row number A two-digit number ranging from 01 to 99, for

of a terminal example, 01.
device

C: column
number of the
terminal
device

R: receive -
optical
interface
T: transmit
optical
interface

Example Label
Figure 4-96 shows an example label.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 262

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-96 Example label for a fiber connecting the device and ODF

The label shown in Figure 4-96 contains the following information:

● "ODF-G01-01-01-R" indicates that the local end of the optical fiber is
connected to receive terminal in row 01, column 01 of the ODF in row G,
column 01.
● "A01-01-05-01-R" indicates that the other end of the optical fiber is
connected to receive optical interface 02 on slot 05 in chassis 01 in the
cabinet in row A, column 01.

4.1.5.3 Labels for Network Cables

This section describes the applicable ranges and meaning of the labels for network
cables.

Applicable Ranges
The labels apply to Ethernet cables.

Information on the Label

Table 4-24 provides information on both sides of a label for an Ethernet cable.

You can modify the label contents if required. If the device is not installed in a
cabinet, you can remove the cabinet number.

Table 4-24 Information on a label for an Ethernet cable

Content Meaning Description

MN-B-C-D MN: cabinet The row and column number of a cabinet.

number For example, A01 indicates row A, column 01.

B: chassis A two-digit number that indicates the

number position of a chassis in a cabinet, for
example, 01. Chassis are numbered from
bottom to top.

C: physical slot A two-digit number, for example, 01. Slots

number are numbered from top to bottom and from
left to right.

D: network port A two-digit number, for example, 01.

number Network ports are numbered from top to
bottom and from left to right.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 263

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Content Meaning Description

MN-Z MN: cabinet The row and column number of a cabinet.

number For example, B02 indicates row B, column 02.

Z: location The location number of the terminal device.

Fill this information in the label on site. If the
cable is connected to a router in a cabinet,
specify the numbers of the cabinet, the
chassis, and the Ethernet interface, for
example, B02-03-12. If the cable is connected
to the network management system (NMS),
provide the specific location of the NMS.

The contents of the labels for network cables connecting hubs and routers or
agents and the network cables for other purposes should be specified according to
actual connections. The details are as follows:
● For the network cable connecting a hub and router, the label on the hub end
should indicate the numbers of the chassis and cabinet where the hub resides,
and the serial number on the hub. The label on the router end should indicate
the number of the chassis and cabinet where the router resides. In case it is a
stand-alone router, the specific position of the router should be provided.
● For the network cable connecting a hub and an agent or a terminal, the label
on the agent or terminal end should contain the number of the network
interface. The definitions of the cabinet number and chassis number are the
same as those described in Table 4-24.
● If it is a stand-alone hub without a cabinet or chassis, the label should contain
specific location information that identifies the hub.
The serial number on the hub, the network interface number of the agent or
terminal, and the location of the stand-alone router should be specified according
to actual connections.

Example Label
Figure 4-97 shows an example label for a network cable.

Figure 4-97 Example label for a network cable

The label shown in Figure 4-97 contains the following information:

● "A01-03-01-01" indicates that the local end of the network cable is connected
to network interface 01 on slot 01 in chassis 03 in the cabinet in row A,
column 01.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 264

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● "B02-03-01" indicates that the other end of the network cable is connected to
network interface 01 in chassis 03 in the cabinet in row B, column 02. No slot
number is specified.

4.1.5.4 Labels for Trunk Cables

This section describes the labels for trunk cables, including the labels for cables
between devices and the labels for cables between a device and a DDF.
There are two types of labels for trunk cables:
● Labels for cables between devices, for example, the label for a cable between
a trunk board and a built-in transmission device and the label for a cable
between two trunk boards. Attach labels to both ends of a cable to indicate
the locations of the cable on both ends.
● Labels for cables between the device and a DDF. Attach labels to both ends of
a cable to indicate the locations of the cable on the device and the DDF.
Trunk cables include 75Ω/120Ω E1 cables, 100Ω T1 cables, 34M, 45M, 140M, and
155M cables, and 120Ω to 75Ω trunk cables.

4.1.5.4.1 Labels for Trunk Cables Between Devices

Meaning of Labels for Trunk Cables Between Devices

Table 4-25 provides information on a label for a trunk cable between devices.

Table 4-25 Information on a label for a trunk cable between devices

Content Meaning Description

MN-B-C-D- MN: cabinet The row and column number of a cabinet. For
R/T number example, A01 indicates row A, column 01.

B: chassis A two-digit number that indicates the position

number of a chassis in a cabinet, for example, 01.
Chassis are numbered from bottom to top.

C: physical slot A two-digit number, for example, 01. Slots are

number numbered from top to bottom and from left to
right.

D: interface A two-digit number, for example, 01. Interfaces

number are numbered from top to bottom and from left
to right.

R: receive -
optical
interface
T: transmit
optical
interface

MN-B-C-D- MN: cabinet The row and column number of a cabinet. For
R/T number example, A01 indicates row A, column 01.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 265

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Content Meaning Description

B: chassis A two-digit number that indicates the position

number of a chassis in a cabinet, for example, 01.
Chassis are numbered from bottom to top.

C: physical slot A two-digit number, for example, 01. Slots are

number numbered from top to bottom and from left to
right.

D: interface A two-digit number, for example, 01. Interfaces

number. are numbered from top to bottom and from left
to right.

R: receive -
optical
interface
T: transmit
optical
interface

Example Label
Figure 4-98 shows an example label for a trunk cable between devices.

Figure 4-98 Example label for a trunk cable between devices

The label shown in Figure 4-98 contains the following information:

● "G01-01-05-01-T" indicates that the local end of the trunk cable is connected
to transmit interface 01 on slot 05 in chassis 01 in the cabinet in row G,
column 01.
● "D02-01-01-01-R" indicates that the other end of the trunk cable is connected
to receive interface 01 on slot 01 in chassis 01 in the cabinet in row D, column
02.

4.1.5.4.2 Labels for Trunk Cables Between the Device and a DDF

Meaning of the Labels for Trunk Cables Between the Device and a DDF
Table 4-26 provides information on a label for a trunk cable between the device
and a DDF.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 266

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-26 Information on a label for a trunk cable between the device and a
DDF
Content Meaning Description

MN-B-C-D- MN: cabinet The row and column number of a cabinet. For
R/T number example, A01 indicates row A, column 01.

B: chassis A two-digit number that indicates the position

number of a chassis in a cabinet, for example, 03.
Chassis are numbered from bottom to top.

C: physical slot A two-digit number, for example, 01. Slots are

number numbered from top to bottom and from left to
right.

D: interface A two-digit number, for example, 01. Interfaces

number are numbered from top to bottom and from left
to right.

R: receive -
optical
interface
T: transmit
optical
interface

DDF-MN-B- MN: DDF M identifies the row number of a DDF. Rows are
C-D/R/T number numbered from A to Z from front to back.
N identifies the column number of a DDF.
Columns are numbered from 01 to 99 from left
to right.
For example, G01 indicates row G, column 01.

B: row number A two-digit number ranging from 01 to 99, for

of a terminal example, 01.
device

C: column
number of the
terminal
device

DDF-MN-B- D: terminal Valid values for D are A and B. A indicates that

C-D/R/T type the DDF is connected to an optical network
R: receive device; B indicates that the DDF is connected to
optical a switching device.
interface
T: transmit
optical
interface

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 267

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Example Label
Figure 4-99 shows an example label for a trunk cable between the device and a
DDF.

Figure 4-99 Example label for a trunk cable between the device and a DDF

The label shown in Figure 4-99 contains the following information:

● "A01-03-01-01-R" indicates that the local end of the trunk cable is connected
to receive interface 01 on slot 01 in chassis 03 in the cabinet in row A, column
01.
● "DDF-G01-01-01-AR" indicates that the other end of the trunk cable is
connected to the receive interface of terminal A in row 01, column 01 of the
DDF in row G, column 01.

4.1.5.5 Labels for User Cables

This section describes the applicable ranges and meaning of the labels for user
cables.

Attach labels to both ends of a cable to indicate the locations of the cable on the
device and the MDF.

Meaning of the Labels for User Cables

Table 4-27 provides information on a label for a user cable.

Table 4-27 Information on a label for a user cable

Content Meaning Description

MN-B-C-D MN: cabinet The row and column number of a cabinet.

number For example, A01 indicates row A, column
01.

B: frame A two-digit number that indicates the

number position of a frame in a cabinet, for example,
03. Frames are numbered from bottom to
top.

C: physical slot A two-digit number, for example, 01. Slots

number are numbered from top to bottom and from
left to right.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 268

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Content Meaning Description

D: cable number A two-digit number, for example, 01. Cables

are numbered from top to bottom and from
left to right.

MDF-MN-B-C MN: MDF M identifies the row number of an MDF.

number Rows are numbered from A to Z from front
to back.
N identifies the column number of an MDF.
Columns are numbered from 01 to 99 from
left to right.
For example, G01 indicates row G, column
01.

B: row number A two-digit number ranging from 01 to 99,

of a terminal for example, 01.
device

C: column
number of the
terminal device

Example Label
Figure 4-100 shows an example label for a user cable.

Figure 4-100 Example label for a user cable

The label shown in Figure 4-100 contains the following information:

● "A01-03-01-01" indicates that the local end of the user cable is connected to
port 01 on slot 01 in chassis 03 in the cabinet in row A, column 01.
● "MDF-G01-01-01" indicates that the other end of the user cable is connected
to the terminal in row 01, column 01 of the MDF in row G, column 01.

4.1.5.6 Labels for Power Cables

This section describes the labels for power cables, including DC and AC power
cables.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 269

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.1.5.6.1 Labels for DC Power Cables

DC power cable labels are attached to DC power cables that feed power to
cabinets, including the -48 V, PGND, and BGND cables. DC power cables refer to
both the power cables themselves and also the protection ground cables.
A label for DC power cables is attached to one side of an identification plate with
a cable tie. Table 4-28 provides information on a label for a DC power cable.

Table 4-28 Information on a label for a DC power cable

Content Description

MN(BC)- MN(BC): BC is written right under MN.

B--48Vn B is a two-digit number that identifies the chassis number, for
example, 01. Chassis are numbered from bottom to top.
MN(BC)-B-
BGND n identifies the power socket number. Power sockets are
numbered 1 to 3 from bottom to top and from left to right.
MN(BC)-B- On the loaded cabinet side, MN identifies the row and
PGND column number of the power distribution facilities, such as
the power control cabinet and power distribution box. BC
identifies the row and column number of the -48 V connector.
BC can be omitted if there is no row or column number, or if
the connector can be identified without them. BGND and
PGND are not assigned rows or columns for identification.
On the power distribution cabinet side, only MN is used to
identify the cabinet.

The label carries location information only about the destination of the power
cable while information of the local end is unnecessary. That is, the label carries
location information only about the opposite device, the control cabinet, or the
power distribution box. Table 4-28 provides information of the label when two
-48 V power connections are used. Label information is similar when other DC
voltages, such as 24 V and 60 V, are used.
Make sure that labels are attached in the correct direction. After the cable ties are
tied onto cables, the identification plates with the labels should face upwards, and
the text on labels in the same cabinet should be in the same direction. Figure
4-101 shows example labels for a DC power cable.

Figure 4-101 Example labels for a DC power cable

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 270

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

The labels shown in Figure 4-101 contain the following information:

● On the loaded cabinet side, the label "A01/B08--48V2" indicates that the
cable is connected to the eighth connector in row B of the -48 V busbar in the
cabinet in row A, column 1.
● On the power distribution box side, the label "B03--48V2" indicates that the
cable is connected to -48 V DC power socket 2 in the loaded cabinet in row B,
column 03.

NOTE

In the power distribution box or power distribution cabinet in a transmission equipment

room, every terminal block on the -48 V connector bar has a numeric identification. For
example, in the above label of "A01/B08--48V2", "08" (or "8") is the numeric identification
of the terminal block.

The terminal blocks are both short-circuited on the PGND and BGND copper bars,
so it makes no difference which terminal is connected. It is only necessary to give
the row and column of the power distribution box, instead of giving the specific
serial number of the terminal block on the copper bar. For example, if the label on
the loaded cabinet side is "A01-BGND", it means that the power cable is a BGND
that connects to the BGND copper bar in the power distribution box in row A,
column 01. Information on the labels for PGND cables should be given in a similar
way.

4.1.5.6.2 Labels for AC Power Cables

AC power cable labels are attached to both ends of an AC power cable that feeds
AC power to cabinets, including 220 V, PGND, and BGND cables. The 220 V AC
cables and related PGND and BGND cables are covered with insulating sheath, so
the labels need to contain only the word "AC" and the cabinet number.
A label for AC power cables is attached to one side of an identification plate with
a cable tie. Table 4-29 provides information on a label for an AC power cable.

Table 4-29 Information on a label for an AC power cable

Content Description

MN-(B)-ACn MN identifies the row and column number of a cabinet or

socket where power is led in.
B is a two-digit number that identifies the chassis number, for
example, 01. Chassis are numbered from bottom to top.
n identifies the power socket number. Power sockets are
numbered 1 to 3 from bottom to top and from left to right.
Serial number of the socket where the power is led in: The
location of the socket is marked according to the actual
location. If the sockets can be identified by row and column
number, they can be numbered following the same rule as for
cabinets. If the sockets cannot be identified by row and
column number, specify the detailed location to avoid
confusion with other sockets.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 271

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

The label carries location information only about the opposite device and the
power socket. Information about the local end is unnecessary.

Make sure that labels are attached in the correct direction. After the cable ties are
tied onto cables, the identification plates with the labels should face upwards, and
the text on the labels in the same cabinet should be in the same direction. Figure
4-102 shows example labels for an AC power cable.

Figure 4-102 Example labels for an AC power cable

The labels shown in Figure 4-102 contain the following information:

● On the loaded cabinet side, the label "A01-AC" indicates that the power cable
is connected to the socket in row A, column 01.
● On the power socket side, the label "B01-AC" indicates that the power cable
is connected to the cabinet in row B, column 01.

4.1.6 Powering on Devices

This chapter describes to the procedures for powering on and powering off a
device.

4.1.6.1 Checking the Installation

After you complete the hardware installation, you need to check the installation of
the devices and cables.

Prerequisite
All hardware devices and cables must be installed.

Background Information
A check before power-on is performed to ensure that the hardware is installed
properly. This is mainly to check the appearance of the devices, and also the
cabinet, cables, plugs, sockets, labels, and environment.

4.1.6.1.1 Device Installation Checklist

This section provides a checklist for checking an installed device before power-on.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 272

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

NOTICE

Before power-on, make sure that the switches of all power distribution units
(PDUs) and power distribution frames (PDFs) are in the "OFF" state.

Table 4-30 lists the items that need to be checked for the installed device.

Table 4-30 Checklist for the installed device

No. Check Item and Description Method

1 The cabinet is placed as required Check this according to the

in the design drawing. engineering design document.

2 The expansion bolts used to fix Check this according to the

the cabinet or holder to the following figure.
ground are fastened firmly. Flat
washers and spring washers are
used and spring washers are
placed on top of flat washers.

3 The installation holes on the Check this by measuring the

support and feet are fit for the megohm range of a multimeter.
expansion bolts. The support is The resistance of each insulating
insulated from the ground; the point must be greater than 5
floor holder is insulated from the megohms.
guide rails.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 273

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

No. Check Item and Description Method

4 The cabinets in the same row are -

evenly aligned with each other.
Rows of cabinets are aligned
along the main aisle, with a
deviation of up to 5 mm (0.20
in.).

5 The accessories on the front and -

back doors of the cabinet are
present. A connecting plate is
installed if two cabinets are
attached to each other.

6 The front door of the cabinet can Check this by unlocking the door
be opened and closed smoothly. according to the following figure.

Check this by locking the door

according to the following figure.

7 The boards can be plugged and -

removed smoothly. Screws on the
board panels, if any, are fastened
properly. The steel wires on the
screws are intact.

8 The surfaces of the device are -

clean and tidy. No component of
the cabinet is deformed.
Otherwise, it will affect the
appearance of the entire device.
All labels are correct, clear, and
complete.

9 The cabinet is clean and there are -

no dust particles inside the
cabinet. There are no extra
bundling straps, cable ends, or
other foreign objects inside the
cabinet.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 274

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

No. Check Item and Description Method

10 The electrostatic discharge (ESD)- Check this according to the

preventive wrist strap is inserted following figure.
into the ESD hole on the cabinet.

11 Blank filler panels are installed in -

all empty slots.

4.1.6.1.2 Cable Installation Checklist

This section provides a checklist for checking the installed cables.

Power Cables and Ground Cables

Table 4-31 lists the items that need to be checked for the installed power cables
and ground cables.

Table 4-31 Checklist for the installed power cables and ground cables
No. Check Item and Description Method

1 Each power cable or ground cable -

must be a single cable with a
copper wire inside it. The cables
must be connected reliably
according to the standards.

2 The power cables and ground -

cables of the devices are connected
reliably. For each grounding
terminal, the spring washer is
placed on top of the flat washer.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 275

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

No. Check Item and Description Method

3 The lug of a power cable or a -

ground cable are welded or pressed
firmly.

4 The power cables and ground Check this according to the

cables outside the cabinet are following figure.
straight. They are bundled
separately from other types of
cables.

5 The extra ends of the power cables -

and ground cables are cut off
instead of being coiled.

6 The ground cable for the cabinet -

door is connected reliably and
firmly.

7 Each power cable or ground cable -

must be labeled according to the
standards. The labels are stuck on a
fixed position on the cables and
they face the same direction
(including the label on the power
distribution switch). It is
recommended that the labels be
stuck at 20 mm away from the
plugs.

8 The power cables and ground -

cables outside the cabinet are at
least 30 mm (1.18 in.) away from
the signal cables.

Cables Inside the Cabinet

Table 4-32 lists the items that need to be checked for the installed cables inside
the cabinet.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 276

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Table 4-32 Checklist for the installed cables inside the cabinet
No. Check Item and Description Method

1 The cables are connected properly -

and firmly.

2 The cable ties do not overlap. They -

are cut smoothly and evenly at
both ends without any burr or
sharp edge.

Signal Cables
Table 4-33 lists the items that need to be checked for the installed signal cables.

Table 4-33 Checklist for the installed signal cables

No. Check Item and Description Method

1 All the signal cables have passed -

the continuity test before they are
laid.

2 The signal cables are not laid over -

the heat-dissipation mesh of the
cabinet.

3 Adequate space is provided for the Check this according to the

cables at the turning points. The following figure.
cables cannot be compressed at the
turning points.

4 The cables are straight and smooth. -

The cables inside the cabinet are
not crossed and the cables outside
the cabinet are bundled.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 277

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

No. Check Item and Description Method

5 Each signal cable is clearly labeled -

at both ends. The labels face the
same direction.

6 The screws on the cables, if any, -

are fastened firmly.

4.2 Parts Replacement

4.2.1 Overview of Parts Replacement

This chapter describes the basic operation process of parts replacement.

4.2.1.1 Basic Operation Process

This section describes the basic operation process of replacing parts.

Context
To ensure that the NE40E-F1 provides uninterrupted communication services for
users in networks, parts of a device are replaced mostly when the power is on.
Therefore, to ensure safe operation of a device and to minimize the impact of
parts replacement on services, maintenance personnel must strictly abide by the
basic operation process regulated in the manual, as shown in Figure 4-103.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 278

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-103 Basic operation process of replacing parts

Procedure
Step 1 Assess the feasibility of the operation.

During the process of troubleshooting or repairing a device, maintenance

personnel must assess whether the operation is feasible before replacing a certain
part.

1. Whether the needed spare parts are available in the depot.

2. Whether the maintenance personnel is qualified for carrying out the
operation. Parts replacement can be carried out only by maintenance
personnel who are professionally trained. That is, maintenance personnel
must familiarize themselves with the functions of each part of the NE40E-F1
know the basic operation process of parts replacement, and master the basic
skills of parts replacement.
3. Whether the risks of the operation can be controlled. Parts replacement is
risky to a certain extent. Hence, improper operation may cause abnormal
running of the device, service interruption, or injuries to the personnel.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 279

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Therefore, before replacing parts, maintenance personnel must

comprehensively evaluate the risks of the operation, that is, whether the risks
can be controlled through certain measures if the system remains active.
Maintenance personnel can replace the parts only when the risks can be
controlled. Otherwise, contact a Huawei local office for timely technical
support.
Step 2 Prepare tools and spare parts.
After determining that the operation is feasible, maintenance personnel need to
prepare tools and spare parts.
1. Prepare spare parts.
2. The common tools include the multimeter, cable tester, ESD wrist strap,
Phillips screwdriver, flat-head screwdriver, needle-nose pliers, cutter, and
pliers.
Step 3 Take protective measures.
Although parts replacement is risky, in most cases, however, maintenance
personnel can prevent the risks by taking protective measures. For example, before
replacing a master board, maintenance personnel can switch services on the
master board to the slave board. After the slave board runs properly, maintenance
personnel can replace the master board. In this manner, interruption of services is
prevented.
Therefore, to ensure safe operation of a device and to minimize the impact of
parts replacement on services, maintenance personnel must take related
protective measures.
Step 4 Replace parts.
After checking that the protective measures are available, maintenance personnel
can carry out parts replacement according to the regulations specified in the
manual, such as removing and inserting a board and setting the Dual In-Line
Package (DIP) switch of a board.
Step 5 Verify the functions of the new parts.
After completing parts replacement, maintenance personnel must verify the
functions of the new parts through the testing methods described in the manual.
The operation is considered as successful only when the new parts are proved to
be running normally. Otherwise, contact a Huawei local office for timely technical
support.
Step 6 Return and repair the faulty parts.
If a part that is replaced is confirmed to be faulty, maintenance personnel should
fill in the Offsite Repair Card for Faulty Materials, and send the card and the faulty
part to a Huawei local office for timely maintenance.

----End

4.2.2 Replacing a Fan Module

This section describes the fan module of the device and the procedure for
replacing the fan module.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 280

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.2.2.1 Introduction to the Fan Module

If one of the five fans fails, the heat dissipation system still allows the device to
work at the ambient temperature of 40°C for a short period and adjusts the fan
speed automatically according to the ambient temperature.

Figure 4-104 NE40E-F1 fan module

4.2.2.2 Replacing a Fan Module

Precautions
● To ensure that system heat dissipation is not affected, you are advised to
complete fan module replacement within 50 seconds.
● The fans are exposed on the left side of the fan module. Keep your fingers,
clothing, and jewelry away from the fans. When you open or close the fan
module, use the handle.

Tools
● ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
● Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
Step 1 Check the location of the fan module to be replaced.
Before removing the old fan module, check its location, for example, the cabinet
and chassis where the fan module resides. Then, locate the fan module to be
replaced in the chassis and attach a label to the panel to identify the fan module
to avoid misoperation.
Step 2 Wear the ESD wrist strap and connect the ground terminal to the ESD jack on the
rack.
Step 3 Hold the ejector lever on the fan module to be replaced and pull out the fan
module smoothly and slowly till the fan module is completely off from the chassis,
as shown in Figure 4-105.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 281

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-105 Removing a fan module

Step 4 Hold the ejector lever on the new fan module and insert the fan module smoothly
and slowly along the guide rail of the slot in the chassis. Push the ejector lever on
the new fan module gently till the fan module is completely inserted into the
chassis. Release the ejector lever, as shown in Figure 4-106.

Figure 4-106 Installing a fan module

Step 5 Verify the functions of the new fan module.

In normal situations, after the new fan module is inserted into the chassis, the
fans inside it immediately start to operate to draw air from the chassis. In this
case, you can check whether the new fan module functions normally in the
following manners:
● If the FAN indicator on the panel of the fan module is steady green, the fan
module runs properly. If the FAN indicator is steady red, the fan module is
faulty.
● Run the display fan command on the console interface to view the running
status of the fan module.
If the new fan module fails to work properly, contact the Huawei local office for
timely technical support.
----End

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 282

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Follow-up Procedure
After completing fan module replacement, collect the tools. If the replaced fan
module is confirmed to be faulty, fill in the Offsite Repair Card for Faulty Materials
and send the faulty fan module together with the card to Huawei for timely repair.

4.2.3 Replacing a Power Module

This section describes the power module of the device and the procedure for
replacing the power module.

4.2.3.1 Introduction to the Power Module

The device has two DC power modules, which work in 1+1 backup mode.

Figure 4-107 DC power module

The device has two AC power modules, which work in 1+1 backup mode.

Figure 4-108 AC power module

4.2.3.2 Replacing a Power Module

Precautions
Before replacing a power module, power it off by turning off the corresponding
circuit breaker on the power distribution cabinet.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 283

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Tools
● ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
● Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
Step 1 Check the location of the power module to be replaced.
Before removing a power module that is to be replaced, check the location of the
module, for example, the cabinet and chassis where the power module resides.
Then, locate the power module to be replaced in the chassis and attach a label to
the panel to identify the power module.
Step 2 Switch off the circuit breaker corresponding to the power module on the power
distribution cabinet to power off the power module.
Step 3 Wear the ESD wrist strap and connect the ground terminal to the ESD jack on the
rack.
Step 4 Remove the protective cover from the wiring terminals on the power module, and
then disconnect power cables from the wiring terminals.
Step 5 Loosen the captive screws on both sides of the power module with a Phillips
screwdriver.
Step 6 Hold the ejector lever on the power module and softly pull the power module out
of the chassis, as shown in Figure 4-109.

Figure 4-109 Removing a power module

Step 7 Insert the backup power module into the chassis.

Hold both sides of the power module and insert the module into the guide rail of
the slot, as shown in Figure 4-110. Ensure that the power module is in good
contact with the backplane of the chassis.
Step 8 Tighten the captive screws with a Phillips screwdriver to fasten the power module
to the chassis.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 284

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Step 9 Connect the cables to the power module in the original sequence, and reinstall the
protective cover.

Figure 4-110 Inserting a power module

Step 10 Switch on the circuit breaker corresponding to the new power module on the
power distribution cabinet. Verify the functions of the new power module.
● If the OUT indicator on the panel of the power module is steady green, the
power output is normal.
If the IN indicator on the panel of the power module is steady green, the
power input is normal.
● Run the display device command on the console interface to check the
running status of the new power module.
If the new power module fails to work properly, contact the Huawei local office
for timely technical support.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After completing power module replacement, collect the tools. If the replaced
power module is confirmed to be faulty, fill in the Offsite Repair Card for Faulty
Materials and send the faulty power module together with the card to Huawei for
timely repair.

4.2.4 Replacing an Optical Module

This section describes the optical module of the device and the procedure for
replacing an optical module.

Precautions
● Replacing an optical module interrupts services. Only the optical modules that
are confirmed to be faulty need to be replaced.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 285

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● Only external optical modules that are pluggable can be replaced. Built-in
optical modules cannot be replaced.
● Take antistatic measures before replacing an optical module.
● You do not need to reseat a board when replacing an optical module.
● Be careful when you remove or insert an optical cable in case the connector
of an optical cable is damaged.
● When replacing an optical module, do not look directly into the fiber
connector as the laser radiation may harm your eyes.

CAUTION

An optical module is an electrostatic sensitive component. Therefore, you must

take antistatic measures during the whole process of replacing an optical module
to prevent the optical module from being damaged.

Tools
● ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves
● ESD bag

Procedure
Step 1 Check the location of the optical module to be replaced.
Before removing an optical module that is to be replaced, check the location of
the module, for example, the cabinet and chassis where the optical module
resides. Then, locate the optical module to be replaced in the chassis and attach a
label to the panel to identify the optical module.
Step 2 Run the display interface interface-type interface-number command to view and
record the type of the optical module to be replaced, as the following output in
bold displays:
<HUAWEI> display interface Gigabitethernet0/3/0
GigabitEthernet0/3/0 current state : DOWN
Line protocol current state : DOWN
Description: HUAWEI, Quidway Series, GigabitEthernet0/3/0 Interface (ifindex: 7)
Route Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 001a-2b11-4d51
The Vendor PN is RTXM191-400
The Vendor Name is WTD
Port BW: 1G, Transceiver max BW: 1G, Transceiver Mode: SingleMode
WaveLength: 1310nm, Transmission Distance: 10km
Rx Power: -1.43dBm, normal range: [-19.014, -3.000]dBm
Tx Power: -4.86dBm, normal range: [-6.859, -2.857]dBm
Loopback:none, full-duplex mode, negotiation: disable, Pause Flowcontrol:Receive Enable and Send
Enable
Last physical up time : 2012-10-11 10:01:20
Last physical down time : 2012-10-11 10:01:19
Current system time: 2012-10-12 09:53:44
Statistics last cleared:2012-10-12 09:02:03
Last 300 seconds input rate: 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Last 300 seconds output rate: 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Input peak rate 88 bits/sec, Record time: 2012-10-12 09:03:45
Output peak rate 78 bits/sec, Record time: 2012-10-12 09:02:54
Input: 2144 bytes, 22 packets
Output: 614 bytes, 7 packets

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 286

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Input:
Unicast: 21 packets, Multicast: 1 packets
Broadcast: 0 packets, JumboOctets: 0 packets
CRC: 0 packets, Symbol: 0 packets
Overrun: 0 packets, InRangeLength: 0 packets
LongPacket: 0 packets, Jabber: 0 packets, Alignment: 0 packets
Fragment: 0 packets, Undersized Frame: 0 packets
RxPause: 0 packets
Output:
Unicast: 6 packets, Multicast: 1 packets
Broadcast: 0 packets, JumboOctets: 0 packets
Lost: 0 packets, Overflow: 0 packets, Underrun: 0 packets
System: 0 packets, Overruns: 0 packets
TxPause: 0 packets
Last 300 seconds input utility rate: 0.00%
Last 300 seconds output utility rate: 0.00%

Step 3 Record the location of the cables and check whether the labels on the cables are
correct and clear. If the labels are hard to identify, re-make labels and re-label the
cables in case the cables are not connected properly.
Step 4 Wear the ESD gloves or wrist strap and connect the ground terminal to the ESD
jack on the rack.
Step 5 Remove the optical module to be replaced.
1. Remove the optical cables from the connector and cover the connector with a
dust cap.
2. Remove the optical module to be replaced.
NOTE

When the operation space is insufficient, you can use a fiber interface clamp to
remove an optical module. Figure 4-111 shows the appearance of a fiber interface
clamp.

Figure 4-111 Fiber interface clamp

3. Hold the ejector lever to pull out the optical module softly from the optical
interface.
4. Place the removed optical module in the ESD bag.
Step 6 Insert the new optical module into the optical interface.
1. Take out the new optical module from the ESD bag and check whether there
is any damage or component missing. Check whether the new optical module
is of the same type as the optical module to be replaced.
2. Insert the new optical module into the optical interface. When the click of the
reed in the optical module is heard, the optical module is correctly inserted.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 287

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

CAUTION

An optical module must not be inserted inversely. If you cannot completely

insert an optical module into the interface, do not push it. Instead, reverse it
and insert it into the interface again.

3. Remove the dust cap from the connector and insert the optical cables in the
original sequence.
Step 7 Verify the functions of the new optical module.
Then, you can verify the functions of the new optical module in the following
manners:
● Check whether the LINK indicator for the optical interface works normally. If
the indicator is green, the link connected to the interface is Up.
● Run the display interface interface-type interface-number command on the
console interface to view the type and running status of the new optical
module. Check whether the type of the new optical module is correct, as the
following output in bold displays:
<HUAWEI> display interface Gigabitethernet0/3/0
GigabitEthernet0/3/0 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Description: HUAWEI, Quidway Series, GigabitEthernet0/3/0 Interface (ifindex: 7)
Route Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 001a-2b11-4d51
The Vendor PN is RTXM191-400
The Vendor Name is WTD
Port BW: 1G, Transceiver max BW: 1G, Transceiver Mode: SingleMode
WaveLength: 1310nm, Transmission Distance: 10km
Rx Power: -1.43dBm, normal range: [-19.014, -3.000]dBm
Tx Power: -4.86dBm, normal range: [-6.859, -2.857]dBm
Loopback:none, full-duplex mode, negotiation: disable, Pause Flowcontrol:Receive Enable and Send
Enable
Last physical up time : 2012-10-11 10:01:20
Last physical down time : 2012-10-11 10:01:19
Current system time: 2012-10-12 09:53:44
Statistics last cleared:2012-10-12 09:02:03
Last 300 seconds input rate: 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Last 300 seconds output rate: 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Input peak rate 88 bits/sec, Record time: 2012-10-12 09:03:45
Output peak rate 78 bits/sec, Record time: 2012-10-12 09:02:54
Input: 2144 bytes, 22 packets
Output: 614 bytes, 7 packets
Input:
Unicast: 21 packets, Multicast: 1 packets
Broadcast: 0 packets, JumboOctets: 0 packets
CRC: 0 packets, Symbol: 0 packets
Overrun: 0 packets, InRangeLength: 0 packets
LongPacket: 0 packets, Jabber: 0 packets, Alignment: 0 packets
Fragment: 0 packets, Undersized Frame: 0 packets
RxPause: 0 packets
Output:
Unicast: 6 packets, Multicast: 1 packets
Broadcast: 0 packets, JumboOctets: 0 packets
Lost: 0 packets, Overflow: 0 packets, Underrun: 0 packets
System: 0 packets, Overruns: 0 packets
TxPause: 0 packets
Last 300 seconds input utility rate: 0.00%
Last 300 seconds output utility rate: 0.00%
● Check whether there is any new alarm or performance event.
● Check whether the services are normal on the new optical module. If the
services are normal, the new optical module is successfully installed.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 288

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

If the new optical module fails to work properly, contact the Huawei local office
for timely technical support.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After completing optical module replacement, collect the tools. If the replaced
optical module is confirmed to be faulty, fill in the Offsite Repair Card for Faulty
Materials, and send the faulty optical module together with the card to Huawei
for timely repair.

4.2.5 Replacing Cables

This chapter describes the precaution and procedure for replacing power cable and
ground cable, network cable, trunk cable, and optical cable.

4.2.5.1 Cable Types

This section describes the cable types of the device.

This chapter introduces the cable types supported by the NE40E and their uses, as
shown in Table 4-34.

Table 4-34 Cable types and uses

Type Use

Power cable and ground The power cable that connects the external power
cable to the input terminal of the power moduleThe
ground cable that connects the ground terminal of
a device to the ground terminal of a power
distribution cabinet

Network cable The network cable that connects an Ethernet

interface to a terminal equipment

Optical cable The optical cable that connects an optical interface

to the ODF or a transmission device

Clock cable The clock cable that connects a clock interface to a

BITS device

4.2.5.2 Replacing a Power Cable and a Ground Cable

This section describes the power cable of the device and the procedure for
replacing the power cable.

4.2.5.2.1 Introduction to a Power Cable

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 289

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

DC-Input Power Cable

DC-input power cables contain a -48 V power cable that connects the NEG
terminal of a power module and a ground cable that connects the RTN terminal
of a power module.
The DC-input power cable transfers the -48 V DC power from DC distribution
equipment to the terminal block of a DC power module to supply power for the
system.
Figure 4-112 shows the appearances of the terminals of the DC-input power cable
of the device.

Figure 4-112 Appearance of the terminal of the DC-input power cable

1. OT bare crimp terminal

4.2.5.2.2 Replacing a Power Cable

Context
Before replacing a power cable, you need to note the following points:
● Make sure that service data is backed up before replacing a power cable.
● Before operation, make sure to cut off all input power supplies in the power
distribution cabinet, and attach an label to the switch to be used.
● The terminals of a DC power cable and other exposed surfaces must be fully
insulated.

Tool
Before replacing a power cable, you need the following tools:
● Terminal of the power module
● Power cable
● ESD wrist strap
● Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
Step 1 Record the location of both ends of the power cable to be replaced and the
cabling mode in case of misoperation.
Step 2 Make a new external power cable and a ground cable. For details, refer to the
"On-site Cable Assembly and Installation" in the Installation Guide

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 290

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Step 3 Loosen the screws on the terminal of the power module with a wrench. Then,
remove the terminal. Pull out the power cable from the guide-in hole on the
cabinet.
Step 4 Install the power cable and ground cable. Pass the new power cable through the
guide-in hole on the cabinet, and connect the terminal of the power module to
the input terminal of the power module in the power distribution cabinet. Then,
tighten the setscrews with a wrench.
Step 5 Make new labels according to the contents of the labels on the old power cable.
For label regulations, refer to the "Engineering Labels for Cables" in the
Installation Guide.
----End

Follow-up Procedure
After replacing a power cable, collect the tools and the replaced cable. Do not
place the old and the new cables together to avoid confusions.

4.2.5.3 Replacing a Network Cable

This section describes the network cable of the device and the procedure for
replacing the network cable.

Context
Before replacing a network cable, you need to note the following points:
● During the process of replacing a network cable, the services are interrupted
temporarily.
● It is recommended that you replace a network cable during the hours when
the network is not busy, for example, from 00:00 am to 06:00 am.

Tool
Before replacing a network cable, you need the following tools:
● Cutter
● Cable tie
● ESD wrist strap or ESD glove
● Cable tester
● Crimper

Procedure
Step 1 Check the location and cabling of the network cable to be replaced.
Step 2 Prepare a new network cable. The type of the new network cable must be
consistent with that of the old network cable. When a network cable is made, test
its connectivity with a cable tester.
Step 3 Wear the ESD gloves or wrist strap and connect the grounding terminal to the
ESD jack on the rack.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 291

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Step 4 Lay out the new network cable according to the original cabling mode.
If you need to replace more than one network cable at a time, you should attach
temporary labels to the new network cables to identify the cables. The new
network cables must be numbered consistently with the network cables to be
replaced.
Step 5 Remove the old network cable and record the location where the old network
cable is installed.
1. Remove the connectors of the network cable.
2. Cut the cable tie with a cutter and remove the network cable.
Step 6 Insert the new network cable connector into the network interface of which the
location is recorded. If a click is heard, it indicates that the insertion is successful.
The indicator of the network interface being steady on and green indicates that
the link is Up.
Step 7 Attach a label to the new network cable, as shown in Figure 4-113.

Figure 4-113 Schematic diagram of attaching a label to a new network cable

Step 8 Bind the cable with a cable tie and cut the redundancies of the tie.
Step 9 Run the ping command to check the connection between both ends of the new
network cable. If both ends fail to communicate normally, check whether the
network cable is damaged or whether the connectors are secured.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After replacing a network cable, collect the tools and the replaced cable. Do not
place the old and the new cables together to avoid confusions.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 292

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

4.2.5.4 Replacing a Trunk Cable

This section describes the trunk cable of the device and the procedure for
replacing the trunk cable.

Context
Before replacing a trunk cable, you need to note the following points:

● During the process of replacing a trunk cable, the services are interrupted
temporarily.
● It is recommended that you replace a trunk cable during the hours when the
network is not busy, for example, from 00:00 am to 06:00 am.

Tool
Before replacing a trunk cable, you need the following tools"

● flat-head screwdriver
● Cutter
● Cable tie
● ESD wrist strap or ESD glove
● Multimeter

Procedure
Step 1 Record the location of both ends of the trunk cable to be replaced and the cabling
mode.

Step 2 Check the type of the new trunk cable.

There are two types of trunk cables:

● 75 Ω coaxial cable
● 120 Ω twisted pair cable

Step 3 The type of the new trunk cable must be consistent with that of the old one.
Make a new label according to the contents of the label on the old trunk cable.

Step 4 Lay out the new trunk cable according to the original cabling mode.

Step 5 Remove the old trunk cable.

1. Put on the ESD gloves or wrist strap and connect the grounding terminal to
the ESD jack on the rack.
2. Turn a screwdriver counter-clockwise to loosen the screws on the connector of
the trunk cable that connects the board.
3. Hold the connector and remove it.
4. Cut the cable tie with a cutter and take out the trunk cable.

Step 6 Insert the connector of the trunk cable into the interface of which the location is
recorded and turn the screwdriver clockwise to tighten the screws on the
connector.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 293

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Step 7 Attach a label to the new trunk cable, as shown in Figure 4-114.

Figure 4-114 Schematic diagram of attaching a label to a trunk cable

Step 8 Bind the cable with a cable tie and cut the redundancies of the tie.
Step 9 Check whether the new trunk cable works normally.
● Check whether the services on the board to which the new cable connects are
normal.
● If there is any alarm or if the services, you need to test the connectivity of the
cable with the multimeter.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After replacing a trunk cable, collect the tools and the replaced cable. Do not
place the old and the new cables together to avoid confusions.

4.2.5.5 Replacing an Optical Cable

This section describes the optical cable of the device and the procedure for
replacing the optical cable.

Context
Before replacing an optical cable, you need to note the flowing points:
● During the process of replacing an optical cable, the services are interrupted
temporarily.
● Be careful when you remove or insert an optical cable in case that the
connector of the optical cable is damaged.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 294

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

● When installing or maintaining an optical interface board or an optical cable,

do not observe an optical interface or connectors of an optical cable.
● The bending radius of a single-mode G.657A2 optical fiber is greater than or
equal to 10 mm, and the bending radius of a multi-mode A1b optical fiber is
greater than or equal to 30 mm.
● Connectors of optical cables are divided into the LC type and the SC type. You
must select an optical cable according to the interface type.

Tool
Before replacing an optical cable, you need the following tools:
● Cutter
● Binding strap
● ESD wrist strap or ESD glove

Procedure
Step 1 Record the location of both ends of the optical cable to be replaced and the
cabling mode.
Step 2 Take out the new optical cable and check whether the type of the new optical
cable is consistent with that of the old one. The multi-mode optical cable is
orange and the single-mode optical cable is yellow.
Step 3 Make a new label according to the contents of the label on the old optical cable.
Step 4 Lay out the new optical cable in the original place.
Step 5 Remove the old optical cable.
1. Put on the ESD gloves or wrist strap and connect the grounding terminal to
the ESD jack on the rack.
2. Hold the connectors and remove them. Then, cover the connectors with dust
caps.
NOTE

If a connector is dusty, clean it with dust-free cloth or fiber cleaning paper.

3. Remove the old optical cable from the corrugated pipe.
Step 6 Insert the new optical cable.
Before inserting the new optical cable, remove the dust caps and keep them
properly for future use. Then, connect both ends of the new optical cable to the
optical interfaces and secure the optical cables.
Step 7 Attach a label to the new optical cable, as shown in Figure 4-115.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 295

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

Figure 4-115 Schematic diagram of attaching a label to a new optical cable

Step 8 Lay out the new optical cable in a tidy manner in the cabinet and bind the optical
cable with a binding strap. Note that the optical cable should be bound with
proper strength and with even space in between. Bind the redundancies of the
optical cable at the ODF side.

Step 9 Check whether the new optical cable works normally.

● Check the LINK indicator at the optical interface. If the indicator is steady on
and green, it indicates that the link is Up.
● Check whether the service on the board where the new optical cable connects
is normal. If the services are normal, it indicates that the optical cable is
replaced successfully.
● Check whether there is any new alarm or performance event.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After replacing an optical cable, collect the tools and the replaced optical cable.
Do not place the old and the new optical cables together to avoid confusions.

4.2.6 Glossary

A
Asynchronizati Asynchronization does not use the exact data signals timed by
on the clock. The signals have different frequencies and phases.
The asynchronizatioin usually encapsulates the bits into the
control flag, which specifies the beginning and end of the bits.

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 296

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

D
DCE Data Circuit-terminating Equipment is a network device
composing the UNI. DCE provides the physical connection to
the network, forwards the data, and provides the clock signals
for the DTE.
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory. The information stored in
the RAM must be refreshed periodically. When the contents of
the DRAM are being refreshed, a user cannot access it. Delay
can thus occur.
DTE Data terminal equipment is a user device composing the UNI.
The DTE accesses the data network through the DCE
equipment (for example, model) and usually uses the clock
signals produced by DCE.

F
Flash Flash is a kind of special Erasable Programmable Read Only
Memory (EEPROM), which can be completely erased and
rewritten one time instead of only one byte.

N
NVRAM Nonvolatile Random Access Memory. The data in NVRAM
cannot be lost when the system is Down.

R
RAM Random Access Memory is a memory that can be lost easily,
and read and rewritten by the micro processor.
ROM Read Only Memory is a memory that cannot be lost easily, and
can only be read, but not written by the micro processor.

S
SRAM Static Random Access Memory is a type of random access
memory. Its contents can be saved only if the SRAM is
provided with the uninterruptible power supply. Unlike the
DRAM, the SRAM does not need to be refreshed repeatedly.

4.2.7 Acronyms and Abbreviations

A
AC Alternating Current
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 297

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

AUX Auxiliary (port)

C
CAN Control Area Network
CE1 Channelized E1
CF Compact Flash
CLK Clock Card
CPU Central Processing Unit
CT1 Channelized T1
CTS Clear to Send

D
DC Direct Current
DCE Data Circuit-terminating Equipment
DSR Data Set Ready
DTE Data Terminal Equipments
DTR Data Terminal Ready

E
EMC Electro Magnetic Compatibility

F
FAD Fabric Adapter
FC Patch Cord (Connector + Fiber)
FCB Fan Control Board
FPIC Flexible Plug-in Card

G
GND Ground

I
IEC International Electrotechnical
Commission

L
LC Lucent Connector

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 298

HUAWEI NE40E-F Series
Hardware Guide 4 Hardware Installation and Parts Replacement

N
NEG Negative
NVRAM Non-Volatile Random Access Memory

O
ODF Optical Distribution Frame
OFL Offline

P
PC Personal Computer
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PCS Physical Coding Sublayer
PGND Protection Ground
PMD Physical Medium Dependent
R
RJ45 Registered Jack 45
RTS Request to Send
RXD Receive Data

S
SC Square Connector
SDRAM Synchronous Dynamic Random Access
Memory
SMB Sub-miniature B

T
TXD Transmit Data

U
UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver/
Transmitter
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair

V
VRP Versatile Routing Platform

Issue 03 (2024-12-31) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 299